Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

AV

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 307

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

AV
A

B
SECTION
AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM C

E
CONTENTS
MULTI AV SYSTEM AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 22 F

PRECAUTION ............................................... 7 WITH BOSE SYSTEM ...............................................22


WITH BOSE SYSTEM : System Description ...........22
G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 7
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM ........................................23
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : System Description....24
SIONER" ................................................................... 7 H
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM ...................... 26
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV
Control Unit ............................................................... 7 WITH BOSE SYSTEM ...............................................26
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .............................. 7 WITH BOSE SYSTEM : System Description ...........26 I
Precaution for Harness Repair .................................. 7
Precaution for Work .................................................. 8 WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM ........................................27
WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : System Description....27
J
PREPARATION ............................................ 9
NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................... 29
PREPARATION ................................................... 9 System Description ..................................................29
Special Service Tools ................................................ 9 K
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 9 TELEMATICS SYSTEM .................................... 32
TELEMATICS SYSTEM .............................................32
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 10
TELEMATICS SYSTEM : System Description ........32 L
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................10 TELEMATICS SYSTEM : Fail-safe .........................33
Component Parts Location ...................................... 10
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) ... 34
AV Control Unit ....................................................... 13 M
Description ...............................................................34
Multifunction Switch ................................................ 14
On Board Diagnosis Function ..................................34
USB Interface .......................................................... 14
CONSULT Function .................................................40
WITH BOSE SYSTEM ............................................... 14 AV
WITH BOSE SYSTEM : BOSE Amp. ...................... 14
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCU) ............................ 42
CONSULT Function .................................................42
WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker ............................ 14
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 44 O
WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM ....................................... 16
WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker .................... 16
AV CONTROL UNIT .......................................... 44
Microphone (for Hands-free Phone/Voice Recog-
Reference Value ......................................................44 P
nition) ...................................................................... 17
TCU ......................................................................... 17 BOSE AMP. ....................................................... 48
Telematics Switch ................................................... 18 Reference Value ......................................................48
Microphone (ANC/ASE) .......................................... 18
Steering Switch ....................................................... 18 TCU ................................................................... 53
Antenna and Antenna Feeder ................................. 18 Reference Value ......................................................53
Steering Angle Sensor ............................................ 20 Fail-safe ...................................................................55

Revision: October 2015 AV-1 2016 Maxima NAM


DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 55 DTC Description .................................................... 111
DTC Index .............................................................. 56 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 111

WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 57 U1223 CONFIG UNFINISH ............................... 112


DTC Description .................................................... 112
MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYS- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 112
TEM) ................................................................... 57
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 57 U1231 BOSE AMP. .......................................... 113
DTC Description .................................................... 113
MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM) ...... 69 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 113
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 69
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 114
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 87 DTC Description .................................................... 114
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 114
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ......... 87
Work Flow ............................................................... 87 U1234 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 115
DTC Description .................................................... 115
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 115
AV CONTROL UNIT .......................................... 89
Description .............................................................. 89 U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN ......................... 116
Work Procedure ...................................................... 89 DTC Description .................................................... 116
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 116
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
TCU .................................................................... 91 U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ............ 117
Description .............................................................. 91 DTC Description .................................................... 117
Work Procedure ...................................................... 91 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 117

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ........ 94 U1267 METER CONN ...................................... 119
Description .............................................................. 94 DTC Description .................................................... 119
Work Procedure ...................................................... 94 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 119
Configuration list ..................................................... 95
U12B7 USB CONN ........................................... 121
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 96 DTC Description .................................................... 121
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 121
B1F01 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ...................... 96
DTC Description ..................................................... 96 U12BE RADIO ANTENNA CONN .................... 122
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 96 DTC Description .................................................... 122
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 122
B1F02 DOOR STATUS SIGNAL ....................... 98
DTC Description ..................................................... 98 U1A01 TCU ....................................................... 124
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 98 DTC Description .................................................... 124
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 124
B1F0B, B1F0C, B1F0D, B1F0E ANC MIC1
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 100 U1A02 TCU ....................................................... 125
DTC Logic ..............................................................100 DTC Description .................................................... 125
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................100 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 125

B1F10, B1F11, B1F12, B1F13 ANC MIC2 U1A05 TCU ....................................................... 126
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 103 DTC Description .................................................... 126
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 126
DTC Logic ..............................................................103
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................103 U1A07 TEL ANTENNA ..................................... 128
B1F15, B1F16, B1F17, B1F18 ANC MIC3 DTC Description .................................................... 128
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 128
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 106
DTC Logic ..............................................................106 U1A08 TEL ANTENNA ..................................... 129
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................106 DTC Description .................................................... 129
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 129
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 109
DTC Description ....................................................109 U1A0B MICROPHONE ..................................... 131
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................109 DTC Description .................................................... 131
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 131
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 111

Revision: October 2015 AV-2 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A0C MICROPHONE .................................... 133 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 170
DTC Description .................................................... 133 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 133 USB CONNECTOR ......................................... 172
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 172
U1A0E TELEMATICS SWITCH ....................... 135
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK ............................... 173 B
DTC Description .................................................... 135
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 135 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 173

U1A0F TELEMATICS SWITCH ....................... 137 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 174 C


DTC Description .................................................... 137
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................. 174
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 137
Symptom Table ..................................................... 174
U1601, U1609 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ....... 139 D
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 177
DTC Description .................................................... 139
Description ............................................................. 177
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 140
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 183 E
U1603, U160B FRONT DOOR TWEETER ...... 142
DTC Description .................................................... 142 AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 183
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 143 Exploded View ....................................................... 183 F
U1626, U162E TWEETER ................................ 145 Removal and Installation ....................................... 183
DTC Description .................................................... 145 STEERING SWITCHES .................................. 184
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 146 Exploded View ....................................................... 184 G
U162A CENTER SPEAKER ............................. 148 Removal and Installation ....................................... 184
DTC Description .................................................... 148 USB INTERFACE AND AUX IN JACK ........... 186
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 148 H
Removal and Installation ....................................... 186
U170A, U170E REAR DOOR SPEAKER ........ 150 INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER ................. 187
DTC Description .................................................... 150 Removal and Installation ....................................... 187 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 151
CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 188
U1721, U1729 REAR SUBWOOFER ............... 153 Removal and Installation ....................................... 188
DTC Description .................................................... 153 J
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 154 FRONT TWEETER .......................................... 189
Exploded View ....................................................... 189
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 156 Removal and Installation ....................................... 189 K
AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 156 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER .............................. 190
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 156 Exploded View ....................................................... 190
L
BOSE AMP. ............................................................. 157 Removal and Installation ....................................... 190
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 157
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 191
TCU .......................................................................... 158 Removal and Installation ....................................... 191 M
TCU : Diagnosis Procedure .................................. 158
REAR SPEAKER ............................................ 192
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 160 Exploded View ....................................................... 192
Removal and Installation ....................................... 192 AV
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 160

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 162 SUBWOOFER ................................................. 193


Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 162 Exploded View ....................................................... 193 O
Removal and Installation ....................................... 193
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 164
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 164 BOSE SPEAKER AMP ................................... 194
Exploded View ....................................................... 194 P
REAR SPEAKER ............................................. 166 Removal and Installation ....................................... 194
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 166
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ...................... 196
TWEETER ........................................................ 168 Removal and Installation ....................................... 196
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 168 Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 196
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 170 ANTENNA AMP. ............................................. 197

Revision: October 2015 AV-3 2016 Maxima NAM


Removal and Installation .......................................197 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MON-
ITOR CONTROL UNIT) .................................... 222
GPS ANTENNA ............................................... 198 CONSULT Function .............................................. 222
Removal and Installation .......................................198
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 225
MICROPHONE ................................................. 199
Removal and Installation .......................................199 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT .. 225
Reference Value ................................................... 225
ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL MICROPHONE ... 200
Fail-Safe ................................................................ 228
Removal and Installation - Front ............................200
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 229
Removal and Installation - Rear ............................200
DTC Index ............................................................. 230
TCU .................................................................. 201
Removal and Installation .......................................201
WIRING DIAGRAM ................................... 231

TEL ANTENNA ................................................ 202 AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .............. 231
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 231
Removal and Installation .......................................202

TELEMATICS SWITCH ................................... 203 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 236


Removal and Installation .......................................203 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 236
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................. 204 Work Flow ............................................................. 236
Removal and Installation .......................................204 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT .. 238
Description ............................................................ 238
PRECAUTION ............................................ 205
Work Procedure .................................................... 238
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 205
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONI-
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
TOR CONTROL UNIT) ..................................... 239
Description ............................................................ 239
SIONER" ................................................................205
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV Work Procedure .................................................... 239
Control Unit ............................................................205 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 240
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ..........................205
Precaution for Harness Repair ..............................205 PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION
Precaution for Work ...............................................206 ADJUSTMENT ........................................................ 240
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
PREPARATION .......................................... 207 TION ADJUSTMENT : Description ....................... 240
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSI-
PREPARATION ............................................... 207 TION ADJUSTMENT : Work Procedure ............... 240
Special Service Tools ............................................207
Commercial Service Tools .....................................207 CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR) ............................................................... 240
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 208 CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND
VIEW MONITOR) : Description ............................. 240
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 208
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND
Component Parts Location ....................................208
VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure ..................... 240
Around View Monitor Control Unit .........................208
Front Camera ........................................................209 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 246
Side Camera ..........................................................209
Rear Camera .........................................................209 U0428 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 246
Steering Angle Sensor ...........................................210 DTC Description .................................................... 246
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 246
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .............. 211
System Description ................................................211 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 248
Fail-Safe ................................................................218
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ......... 248
HANDLING PRECAUTION .............................. 221 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT :
Display ...................................................................221 DTC Description .................................................... 248
Around View Monitor .............................................221 AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 248

Revision: October 2015 AV-4 2016 Maxima NAM


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 250 Removal and Installation ....................................... 273
A
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ......... 250 FRONT CAMERA ............................................ 274
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Removal and Installation ....................................... 274
DTC Description .................................................... 250
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : SIDE CAMERA ................................................ 275 B
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 250 Removal and Installation ....................................... 275

U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIR- REAR CAMERA .............................................. 276
C
CUIT .................................................................. 251 Removal and Installation ....................................... 276
DTC Description .................................................... 251 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGA-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 251 TION) D
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL PRECAUTION ............................................ 277
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 254
DTC Description .................................................... 254 PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 277 E
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 254 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL SIONER" ............................................................... 277
F
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 257 Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV
DTC Description .................................................... 257 Control Unit ............................................................ 277
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 257 Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 277
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 277 G
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL Precaution for Work ............................................... 278
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 260
DTC Description .................................................... 260 PREPARATION ......................................... 279 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 260
PREPARATION ............................................... 279
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 263 Special Service Tools ............................................ 279
DTC Description .................................................... 263 Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 279 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 263
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 280
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT ..................... 264 J
DTC Description .................................................... 264 COMPONENT PARTS .................................... 280
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 264 Component Parts Location .................................... 280
AV Control Unit ...................................................... 280
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION ........ 268 Rear View Camera ................................................ 281 K
DTC Description .................................................... 268 Steering Angle Sensor ........................................... 281
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 268
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ................... 282 L
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH .............................. 269 System Description ................................................ 282
DTC Description .................................................... 269
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 269 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) . 285
Description ............................................................. 285 M
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 270 On Board Diagnosis Function ................................ 285
CONSULT Function ............................................... 291
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT ......... 270
AV
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Di- ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 293
agnosis Procedure ................................................ 270
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 293
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 271 Reference Value .................................................... 293 O
Fail-Safe ................................................................ 294
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .............. 271
Symptom Table ..................................................... 271 WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 296
P
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 272 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ................... 296
Description ............................................................ 272 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 296
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 273 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 300
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT .. 273 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 300
Exploded View ...................................................... 273 Work Flow .............................................................. 300

Revision: October 2015 AV-5 2016 Maxima NAM


DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 302 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 305
Description ............................................................ 305
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (WITH
REAR VIEW MONITOR) .................................. 302 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 306
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................302
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 306
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 304 Exploded View ...................................................... 306
Removal and Installation ....................................... 306
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ................... 304
Symptom Table .....................................................304 REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 307
Removal and Installation ....................................... 307

Revision: October 2015 AV-6 2016 Maxima NAM


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000012250274

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
F
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni- H
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the I
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV Control Unit INFOID:0000000012193716
J
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal, display control unit, and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more
after turning the ignition switch OFF. K
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the display control unit, and the AV control unit continues operating for
approximately 30 seconds.
L
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000012193717

M
M-CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. AV
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000012193718 O

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
P

Revision: October 2015 AV-7 2016 Maxima NAM


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

PKIA0306E

• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000012193719

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
- Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: October 2015 AV-8 2016 Maxima NAM


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000012193720
B
The actual shape of the tools may differ from those illustrated here.
Tool number Description
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
— Removing trim components
(J-46534) D
Trim Tool Set

AWJIA0483ZZ

F
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000012193721

G
Tool name Description
Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts
H

PIIB1407E

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-9 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000012193722

WITH BOSE SYSTEM

AWNIA4105ZZ

A. View of instrument panel lower console B. View of overhead console

Revision: October 2015 AV-10 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

No. Component Function A


1. BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : BOSE Amp.".
2. Rear subwoofer RH Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
Rear microphone (active noise
B
3. Refer to AV-18, "Microphone (ANC/ASE)".
control)
4. Satellite Antenna Refer to AV-18, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
C
5. Antenna amp. Refer to AV-18, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
Front right microphone active
6. Refer to AV-18, "Microphone (ANC/ASE)".
noise control)
D
7. Rear door speaker RH Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker"
8. Door tweeter RH Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
9. Tweeter RH Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker". E
10. Front door speaker RH Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
11. GPS antenna Refer to AV-18, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
F
12. Center speaker Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
13. TCU Refer to AV-17, "TCU".
14. AV control unit Refer to AV-13, "AV Control Unit". G
15. Tweeter LH Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
16. Front door speaker LH Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
17. Door tweeter LH Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
H

18. Multifunction switch Refer to AV-14, "Multifunction Switch".


19. Steering switches Refer to AV-18, "Steering Switch".
I
20. Rear door speaker LH Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
Front left microphone active noise
21. Refer to AV-18, "Microphone (ANC/ASE)".
control) J
22. Rear subwoofer LH Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
23. USB interface-1 Refer to AV-14, "USB Interface".
24. USB interface-2 Refer to AV-14, "USB Interface". K
25. AUX in jack Refer to AV-14, "USB Interface".
26. Microphone Refer to AV-17, "Microphone (for Hands-free Phone/Voice Recognition)". L
27. Telematics switch Refer to AV-18, "Telematics Switch".

WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM


M

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-11 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AWNIA4106ZZ

A. View of instrument panel lower console B. View of overhead console

No. Component Function


1. Rear speaker RH Refer to AV-16, "WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
2. Antenna amp. Refer to AV-18, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
3. Satellite antenna Refer to AV-18, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
4. Rear door speaker RH Refer to AV-16, "WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
5. Front door speaker RH Refer to AV-16, "WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
6. Tweeter RH Refer to AV-16, "WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".

Revision: October 2015 AV-12 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
No. Component Function
A
7. GPS antenna Refer to AV-18, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder".
8. Tweeter LH Refer to AV-16, "WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
9. AV control unit Refer to AV-13, "AV Control Unit". B
10. Front door speaker RH Refer to AV-14, "WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
11. Steering switch Refer to AV-18, "Steering Switch".
12. Multifunction switch Refer to AV-14, "Multifunction Switch". C
13. Rear door speaker LH Refer to AV-16, "WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
14. Rear speaker LH Refer to AV-16, "WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker".
D
15. USB interface-1 Refer to AV-14, "USB Interface".
16. USB interface-2 Refer to AV-14, "USB Interface".
17. AUX in jack Refer to AV-14, "USB Interface". E
18. Microphone Refer to AV-17, "Microphone (for Hands-free Phone/Voice Recognition)".

AV Control Unit INFOID:0000000012193723 F

DESCRIPTION
• AV control unit is located in the center of the instrument panel. G
• AV control unit controls the audio system of Multi AV system.
• AV control unit controls the navigation system of Multi AV system.
• AV control unit can store applications in the built-in memory by
H
connecting a cell phone via Bluetooth® communication or USB
communication.

ALNIA1763ZZ J
SPECIFICATION

Amplifier output (models without BOSE) 40 W × 4 ch K


CD-ROM (CD-DA)
Playable disc CD-R
L
CD-RW
MP3
CD drive Playable format WMA M
AAC
Artist name
AV
Text display function ID3/WMA/AAC tag Album title
Song title

Revision: October 2015 AV-13 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Multifunction Switch INFOID:0000000012400179

• Multifunction switch is located on the center console.


• Display of the AV control unit can be operated.
NOTE:
Camera switch signal is transmitted to the AV control unit by way of
the integral switch via hard wire.

JSNIA6001ZZ

USB Interface INFOID:0000000012193724

• Front USB interface is located in the lower instrument panel con-


sole box.
• USB interface supports the following input and is used by audio
system and navigation system:

Interface
USB port
Audio jack

ALNIA1764ZZ

WITH BOSE SYSTEM


WITH BOSE SYSTEM : BOSE Amp. INFOID:0000000012193725

• BOSE amp. is located in the rear parcel shelf area.


• It receives sound signal from AV control unit and outputs sound
signal to each speaker, tweeter, and subwoofers.

JSNIA5816ZZ

WITH BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker INFOID:0000000012193726

TWEETER
• φ2 in (5.08 cm) speaker is installed to the side of instrument panel.
• Sound signal is inputted from the BOSE speaker amp. to output
high and mid range sound.

Maximum input : 22.5 W


Rated input : 7.5 W
Impedance : 3.6 Ω

JSNIA5817ZZ

CENTER SPEAKER

Revision: October 2015 AV-14 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
• φ3 in (7.62 cm) speaker is installed to the center of instrument
panel. A
• Sound signal is inputted from the BOSE speaker amp. to output
high and mid range sound.
B
Maximum input : 22.5 W
Rated input : 7.5 W
Impedance : 3.6 Ω
C

JSNIA5817ZZ

D
DOOR TWEETER
• φ1 in (2.5 cm) speaker is installed to the front door sash inner
cover.
• Sound signal is inputted from the BOSE speaker amp. to output E
high range sound.

Maximum input : 22.5 W F


Rated input : 7.5 W
Impedance : 3.6 Ω
G
JSNIA5577ZZ

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER H


• φ6 x 9 in (15.24 x 22.86 cm) speaker is installed to the lower por-
tion of the front door.
• Sound signal is inputted from the BOSE speaker amp. to output
low range sound. I

Maximum input : 22.5 W


Rated input : 7.5 W J
Impedance : 3.6 Ω

K
ALNIA1765ZZ

REAR DOOR SPEAKER


• φ3 in (7.62 cm) speaker is installed to the bottom of the rear door. L
• Sound signal is inputted from the BOSE speaker amp. to output
high, mid and low range sound.
M
Maximum input : 21.6 W
Rated input : 7.2 W
Impedance : 3.7 Ω
AV

JSNIA6006ZZ O
REAR SUBWOOFERS
P

Revision: October 2015 AV-15 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
• φ6 x 9 in (15.24 x 22.86 cm) speakers are installed in the rear trunk
area, under the rear parcel shelf.
• Sound signal is inputted from the BOSE speaker amp. to output
low range sound.

Maximum input : 40.5 W


Rated input : 13.6 W
Impedance : 1.0 Ω

ALNIA1765ZZ

WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM


WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : Speaker INFOID:0000000012193727

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER


• φ6 x 9 in (15.24 x 22.86 cm) speaker is installed to the lower por-
tion of the front door.
• Sound signal is inputted from the AV control unit to output low
range sound.

Maximum input : 38.5 W


Rated input : 12.9 W
Impedance : 2.1 Ω

ALNIA1765ZZ

TWEETER
• φ2 in (5.08 cm) speaker is installed to the side of instrument panel.
• Sound signal is inputted from the AV control unit to output high,
and mid range sound.

Maximum input : 22.5 W


Rated input : 7.5 W
Impedance : 3.6 Ω

JSNIA5817ZZ

REAR DOOR SPEAKER


• φ3 in (7.62 cm) speaker is installed to the bottom of the rear door.
• Sound signal is inputted from the AV control unit to output high mid
and low range sound.

Maximum input : 38.5 W


Rated input : 12.9 W
Impedance : 2.1 Ω

JSNIA5958ZZ

REAR SPEAKER

Revision: October 2015 AV-16 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
• φ6 x 9 in (15.24 x 22.86 cm) speaker is installed in the rear trunk
area, under the rear parcel shelf. A
• Sound signal is inputted from the AV control unit to output low
range sound.
B
Maximum input : 38.5 W
Rated input : 12.9 W
Impedance : 2.1 Ω
C

ALNIA1765ZZ

D
Microphone (for Hands-free Phone/Voice Recognition) INFOID:0000000012400937

WITH TELEMATICS SYSTEM


E
• Microphone is installed on the map lamp assembly.
• The microphone is used for the operation of the NISSANCON-
NECTSM, hands-free phone system, voice recognition function.
• The power is supplied from the TCU to the microphone, transmit- F
ting sound signals to the TCU at the during operation of the NIS-
SANCONNECTSM system, hands-free phone communication, and
voice recognition. G

H
JSNIA6009ZZ

WITHOUT TELEMATICS SYSTEM


• The microphone is installed on the map lamp assembly. I
• The power is supplied from the AV control unit to the microphone,
transmitting sound signals to the AV control unit at the during
hands-free phone communication, or voice recognition.
J

JSNIA6009ZZ L
TCU INFOID:0000000012378529

• TCU is abbreviation of Telematics Control Unit. M


• It is installed on the instrument lower cover.
• A radio communication terminal and SIM card are built into the unit
and data is sent and received in SMS*1, DTMF tone signal and AV
packet communication*2 with the NISSANCONNECTSM Data Cen-
ter through the TEL antenna.
NOTE: O
*1: SMS stands for Short Message Service. It is also referred to as
Text Messaging, Short Mail, etc. It is the service that performs text
based message communication.
*2: Packet communication means a communication method that P
data are broken down into smaller chunks for communication. The AWNIA4103ZZ

split data is called a packet and this method improves the effi-
ciency of the communication circuit.
• It is connected to the AV control unit with the USB harness for sound signal input/output and USB communi-
cation.
• VIN information necessary for the Telematics service is memorized.

Revision: October 2015 AV-17 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
• It is connected to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit via CAN communication. TCU performs an emergency
report when the air bag is inflated.
• Audio signals received during SOS/NISSANCONNECTSM Response Specialists call are transmitted from
TCU to each speaker via the AV control unit.
• During the communication with NISSANCONNECTSM Data Center and Nissan Connection™ Response
Center, TCU prohibit the use of Bluetooth® hands-free phone.
Telematics Switch INFOID:0000000012378530

• The Telematics switch is located on the map lamp assembly.


• The Telematics switch is connected to TCU and transmits an oper-
ation signal.
• The state of LED (ON/Blink/OFF) shows the status of SOS call.

LED ON :SOS Call available


LED Blink :SOS Call in communication
LED OFF :Out of service area or system error

JSNIA5899ZZ

Microphone (ANC/ASE) INFOID:0000000012401420

• Three microphones are installed in the headliner.


• These microphones are used for the active noise cancellation and
active sound enhancement.
• The power is supplied from the BOSE amp. to the microphones.

JSNIA6195ZZ

Steering Switch INFOID:0000000012193729

• Hands-free phone, navigation, and audio operations can be per-


formed.
• This switch is connected to combination meter, and switch opera-
tion signal is transmitted to combination meter.
• Combination meter transmits steering switch signal to AV control
unit via AV communication.

AWNIA4088ZZ

Antenna and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000012193730

GPS ANTENNA

Revision: October 2015 AV-18 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
• GPS antenna is installed in the instrument panel.
• Power is supplied from the AV control unit. A
• This antenna amplifies radio waves received from the GPS satel-
lite and transmits the GPS signal to the AV control unit.
NOTE:
B
An object on the instrument panel may cause the reception sensitiv-
ity to be decreased.

JSNIA5132ZZ

D
SATELLITE ANTENNA
• Satellite radio antenna is installed to the rear center of the roof.
• Receives satellite radio waves and outputs them to AV control unit.
E

G
AWNIA4089ZZ

ANTENNA AMP. AND RADIO ANTENNA H


• Antenna amp. is located on the passenger side inner C-pillar.

K
AWNIA4087ZZ

• AM/FM radio main antenna and FM radio sub antenna are located on the rear window glass. L
• The AM/FM radio main antenna path has an antenna amp. to obtain sufficient reception power.

AV

O
JSNIA4204GB

CAUTION:
Affixing any mirror-type window films or metallic items (e.g. commercial antenna) on the rear window
glass causes a reduction in the radio receiver sensitivity. P

ANTENNA FEEDER

Revision: October 2015 AV-19 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AWNIA4099ZZ

1. R203 2. R202 3. Antenna amp.


4. R204, R205 5. R206 6. R200, R201, M198, M199
7. M195 8. M194 9. M196
10. M166 11. M165 12. M167

Steering Angle Sensor INFOID:0000000012193731

WITH AROUND VIEW MONITOR


• Steering angle sensor is installed to the spiral cable.
• Steering angle sensor sends the steering angle signal necessary
for predictive course line of the front or rear view monitor to the
around view monitor control unit via CAN communication.

JSNIA1571ZZ

WITHOUT AROUND VIEW MONITOR

Revision: October 2015 AV-20 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
• Steering angle sensor is installed to the spiral cable.
• Steering angle sensor sends the steering angle signal necessary A
for predictive course line of the rear view monitor to the AV control
unit via CAN communication.
B

JSNIA1571ZZ

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-21 2016 Maxima NAM


AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
AUDIO SYSTEM
WITH BOSE SYSTEM
WITH BOSE SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012193732

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWNIA4101GB

DESCRIPTION
Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating instructions.
• Audio system consists of the following functions:

Function
Radio
CD
USB interface-1
USB interface-2
AUX in jack

Bluetooth® audio
Audio indicator
• Audio system is controlled by AV control unit, and BOSE amp.
• Audio system can be operated with steering switch.
AV CONTROL UNIT
AM/FM Radio
• Radio signal for AM/FM radio is received by the antenna line printed on rear window.
• There are main and sub lines for the print of antenna line. Main is used for AM and FM, and sub is used for
FM.
NOTE:
For FM radio with FM diversity function, AV control unit selects from main or sub the antenna that receives
the higher signal strength.

Revision: October 2015 AV-22 2016 Maxima NAM


AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
• Antenna amp. is connected to the main antenna line, which receives the antenna amp. ON signal from the
AV control unit and transmits the antenna signal to the AV control unit after amplifying the signal received A
from the AM and FM antennas.
• AV control unit transmits the sound signal to the BOSE amp. when the antenna signal is received from the
antenna (main or sub).
B
• BOSE amp. transmits the sound signal received from AV control unit to each speaker.
Satellite Radio
• Satellite radio tuner is built into AV control unit. C
• Sound signal (satellite radio) is received by satellite radio antenna and is transmitted to AV control unit. AV
control unit outputs sound signal to BOSE amp. The signal is also outputted from BOSE amp. to each
speaker.
D
CD
AV control unit integrates the mechanism for reading the data stored in CD.
Music playback E
• When AV control unit reads the music data from CD, it transmits the sound signal to BOSE amp.
• BOSE amp. transmits the sound signal received from AV control unit to each speaker.
Display of artist, album and song title F
• When AV control unit reads the text data from CD, it displays the test data (artist, album, and song title).
NOTE:
For the types of disc and music data format available for replay, refer to AV-13, "AV Control Unit". G
USB INTERFACE
• USB interfaces are located in the lower instrument panel console.
• When iPod® or USB memory is connected to the USB port, the USB interface transmits the music data and H
text data in iPod® or USB memory device to the AV control unit via USB communication.
• When the AV control unit transmits the sound signal from the AV control unit, it transmits the sound signal to
BOSE amp. I
• BOSE amp. transmits the sound signal received from AV control unit to each speaker.
• When AV control unit receives the text data from USB interface, it displays the text data (artist, album, and
song title) on the display.
J
AUX
• Auxiliary input jack is located in the lower instrument panel console.
• Auxiliary input jack consist of the sound input terminal. K
• When sound data is inputted into the sound input terminal, the AUX in jack transmits the AUX sound signal
to the AV control unit.
• When AV control unit receives the AUX in jack sound signal, it transmits the sound signal to BOSE amp.
• BOSE amp. transmits the sound signal received from AV control unit to each speaker. L

BLUETOOTH® AUDIO
• Bluetooth® module is integrated into the AV control unit. M
• Music data, artist, album, and song title in a portable audio device can be played/displayed via Bluetooth®
communication.
• The AV control unit transmits the sound signal to the BOSE amp. AV
• BOSE amp. transmits the sound signal received from AV control unit to each speaker.
• When AV control unit receives the text data from a portable audio device via Bluetooth® communication, it
displays the text data (artist, album, and song title) on the display.
O
• For further information about Bluetooth® compliant profile, refer to AV-13, "AV Control Unit".
AUDIO INDICATOR
• The AV control unit transmits the meter display signal as the audio status to the combination meter via CAN P
communication.
• When combination meter receives the meter display signal, the audio status is displayed on the information
display in combination meter.
WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM

Revision: October 2015 AV-23 2016 Maxima NAM


AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012193733

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWNIA4102GB

AV Control Unit Input Signal (CAN Communication)

Transmit unit Signal name


ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Vehicle speed signal

DESCRIPTION
Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating instructions.
• Audio system consists of the following functions:

Function
Radio
CD
USB interface-1
USB interface-2
AUX in jack
Speed Sensitive Volume
Audio indicator
• Audio system is controlled by the AV control unit.
• Audio system can be operated with steering switch.
RADIO
AM/FM radio
• Radio signal for AM/FM radio is received by the antenna line printed on rear window.
• There are main and sub lines for the print of antenna line. Main is used for AM and FM, and sub is used for
FM.
NOTE:

Revision: October 2015 AV-24 2016 Maxima NAM


AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
For FM radio with FM diversity function, AV control unit selects from main or sub the antenna that receives
the higher signal strength. A
• Antenna amp. is connected to the main antenna line, which receives the antenna amp. ON signal from the
AV control unit and transmits the antenna signal to the AV control unit after amplifying the AM or FM radio
signal.
B
• AV control unit transmits the sound signal to each speaker when the antenna signal is received from the
antenna (main or sub).
Satellite Radio
C
• Satellite radio tuner is built into AV control unit.
• Sound signal (satellite radio) is received by satellite radio antenna and is transmitted to AV control unit. AV
control unit outputs sound signal to each speaker.
D
CD
AV control unit integrates the mechanism for reading the data stored in CD.
Music playback E
• When AV control unit reads the music data from CD, it transmits the sound signal to each speaker.
Display of artist, album and song title
• When AV control unit reads the text data from CD, it displays the test data (artist, album, and song title). F
NOTE:
For the types of disc and music data format available for replay, refer to AV-13, "AV Control Unit".
USB INTERFACE G
• USB interfaces are located in front in the lower instrument panel console.
• When iPod® or USB memory is connected to the USB interface, the USB interface transmits the music data
and text data in iPod® or USB memory device to the AV control unit via USB communication. H
• The AV control unit transmits the sound signal to each speaker.
• When AV control unit receives the text data from external data input box, it displays the text data (artist,
album, and song title) on the display. I
AUX
• Auxiliary input jack is located in the lower instrument panel console.
• Auxiliary input jack consist of the sound input terminal. J
• When sound data is inputted into the sound input terminal, the AUX in jack transmits the AUX sound signal
to the AV control unit.
• When AV control unit receives the AUX sound signal, it transmits the sound signal to each speaker. K
®
BLUETOOTH AUDIO
• Bluetooth® module is integrated in the AV control unit.
L
• Music data, artist, album, and song title in a portable audio device can be played/displayed via Bluetooth®
communication.
• The AV control unit transmits the sound signal to each speaker.
M
• When AV control unit receives the text data from a portable audio device via Bluetooth® communication, it
displays the text data (artist, album, and song title) on the display.
• For further information about Bluetooth® compliant profile, refer to AV-13, "AV Control Unit".
AV
SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME
• AV control unit receives the vehicle speed signal from combination meter via CAN communication and trans-
mits the vehicle speed signal to AV control unit via CAN communication.
O
• AV control unit determines the volume level according to the vehicle speed signal received and transmits the
sound signal to each speaker.
• The AV control unit receives the vehicle speed signal from the combination meter and changes the sound
volume in conjunction with the vehicle speed. P
• The control level can be selected by the customer.
AUDIO INDICATOR
• The AV control unit sends the status of audio to the AV control unit via AV communication.
• The AV control unit transmits the meter display signal as the audio status to the combination meter via AV
communication.
• When combination meter receives the meter display signal, the audio status is displayed on the information
display in combination meter.
Revision: October 2015 AV-25 2016 Maxima NAM
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
WITH BOSE SYSTEM
WITH BOSE SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012193734

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWNIA3876GB

DESCRIPTION
• Refer to Owner’s Manual for hands-free phone system operating instructions.
• For further information about Bluetooth® compliant profile, refer to AV-13, "AV Control Unit".
• Simply operating the steering switch without releasing hands from the steering wheel allows the driver to
receive a phone call.
• When a Bluetooth® communication compliant phone is registered to the AV control unit, hands-free phone
communication can be performed. Five units of Bluetooth® communication devices, including audio devices
and cell phones, can be registered to the AV control unit.
• The content of the memory (telephone book) of the cellular phone can be recorded in the AV control unit.
When Receiving a Call
• When AV control unit receives the voice of the other party from a cell phone via Bluetooth® communication,
it transmits the TEL voice signal to BOSE amp.
• BOSE amp. transmits the sound signal received from AV control unit to each speaker.
When a Call Is Originated
When AV control unit receives the microphone signal from microphone, it transmits the sound signal to a cell
phone via Bluetooth® communication.
HANDS-FREE PHONE INDICATOR
• When a cell phone that is connected with the AV control unit via Bluetooth® communication receives a
phone call, the incoming call is displayed on the information display in combination meter.
• When AV control unit recognizes an incoming call from a cell phone via Bluetooth® communication, it trans-
mits the meter display signal to combination meter via AV communication.
• When combination meter receives the meter display signal, it displays the incoming call of cell phone on
information display.
• When an incoming call is received, the driver can operate the steering switch to answer the phone.
• When steering switch is operated, the combination meter receives the steering switch signal, and then com-
bination meter transmits the steering switch signal to the AV control unit via CAN communication.
• When AV control unit receives the steering switch signal, it activates the hands-free phone.
SMS INDICATOR
• When a cell phone that is connected with the AV control unit via Bluetooth® communication receives an
SMS, the incoming SMS is displayed on the information display located in combination meter.
• The AV control unit transmits an SMS signal to the combination meter via CAN communication when receiv-
ing SMS from a cellular phone via Bluetooth® communication.

Revision: October 2015 AV-26 2016 Maxima NAM


HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
• The combination meter indicates the reception of SMS on the information display when receiving an SMS
signal. A
• When an SMS is received, the SMS can be confirmed by operating the steering switch.
• When steering switch is operated, the combination meter receives the steering switch signal, and then com-
bination meter transmits the steering switch signal to the AV control unit via CAN communication.
B
• When AV control unit receives the steering switch signal, it transmits the SMS signal to combination meter
via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives the SMS signal, it displays SMS on information display.
WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM C

WITHOUT BOSE SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012193735

D
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWNIA3874GB I
DESCRIPTION
• Refer to Owner’s Manual for hands-free phone system operating instructions.
• For further information about Bluetooth® compliant profile, refer to AV-13, "AV Control Unit". J
• Simply operating the steering switch without releasing hands from the steering wheel allows the driver to
receive a phone call.
• When a Bluetooth® communication compliant phone is registered to the AV control unit, hands-free phone K
communication can be performed. Five units of Bluetooth® communication devices, including audio devices
and cell phones, can be registered to the AV control unit.
• The content of the memory (telephone book) of the cellular phone can be recorded in the AV control unit. L
When Receiving a Call
• When AV control unit receives the voice of the other party from a cell phone via Bluetooth® communication,
it transmits the TEL voice signal to each speaker. M

When a Call Is Originated


When AV control unit receives the microphone signal from microphone, it transmits the sound signal to a cell
AV
phone via Bluetooth® communication.
HANDS-FREE PHONE INDICATOR
• When a cell phone that is connected with the AV control unit via Bluetooth® communication receives a O
phone call, the incoming call is displayed on the information display in combination meter.
• When AV control unit recognizes an incoming call from a cell phone via Bluetooth® communication, it trans-
mits the meter display signal to combination meter via CAN communication. P
• When combination meter receives the meter display signal, it displays the incoming call of cell phone on
information display.
• When an incoming call is received, the driver can operate the steering switch to answer the phone.
• When steering switch is operated, the combination meter receives the steering switch signal, and then com-
bination meter transmits the steering switch signal to the AV control unit via CAN communication.
• When AV control unit receives the steering switch signal, it activates the hands-free phone.
SMS INDICATOR
Revision: October 2015 AV-27 2016 Maxima NAM
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
• When a cell phone that is connected with the AV control unit via Bluetooth® communication receives an
SMS, the incoming SMS is displayed on the information display located in combination meter.
• The AV control unit transmits an SMS signal to the combination meter via CAN communication when receiv-
ing SMS from a cellular phone via Bluetooth® communication.
• The combination meter indicates the reception of SMS on the information display when receiving an SMS
signal.
• When an SMS is received, the SMS can be confirmed by operating the steering switch.
• When steering switch is operated, the combination meter receives the steering switch signal, and then com-
bination meter transmits the steering switch signal to the AV control unit via CAN communication.
• When AV control unit receives the steering switch signal, it transmits the SMS signal to combination meter
via CAN communication.
• When combination meter receives the SMS signal, it displays SMS on information display.

Revision: October 2015 AV-28 2016 Maxima NAM


NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
System Description INFOID:0000000012193736

SYSTEM DIAGRAM B

G
AWNIA3877GB

AV Control Unit Input Signal (CAN Communication)


H
Transmit unit Signal name
Combination meter Parking brake switch signal
I
BCM Shift position signal (Reverse signal)

DESCRIPTION
• Refer to Owner’s Manual for navigation system operating instructions. J
• Navigation system can be operated with the AV control unit.
• Guidance voice is outputted from the AV control unit via BOSE amp. to the front speaker.
• AV control unit calculates the vehicle location based on the signals from GYRO (angle speed sensor), vehi-
cle sensor, and GPS satellite as well as the map data from map SD card. It is displayed on display of the AV K
control unit.
POSITION DETECTION PRINCIPLE L
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three
signals:
• Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor.
• Turning angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor). M
• Direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS antenna (GPS information).
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data
read from the map SD card (map-matching) and indicated on the screen as a vehicle mark. More accurate AV
data is judged and used by comparing vehicle position detection results found of the GPS with the result by
map-matching.
O
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the dis-
tance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.
• Travel distance P
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sen-
sor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become incorrect
as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance cor-
rection function has been adopted.
• Travel direction

SEL684V

Revision: October 2015 AV-29 2016 Maxima NAM


NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a
GPS antenna (GPS information). They have both advantages and disadvantages.

Type Advantage Disadvantage


Gyroscope Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite Direction errors may accumulate when vehicle is
(angular velocity sensor) accurately. driven for long distances without stopping.
GPS antenna Can detect the vehicle's travel direction Correct direction cannot be detected when vehicle
(GPS information) (North/South/East/West). speed is low.
More accurate traveling direction is detected because priorities are set for the signals from these two
devices according to the situation.
MAP-MATCHING
Map-matching compares a current location detected by the method
in the “Location Detection Principle” with the road map data from
map SD card.
NOTE:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map SD card.

SEL685V

The vehicle position may not be corrected under the following circumstances and after driving for a certain
time when GPS information is difficult to receive:
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be
shown and prioritized after the road on which the vehicle is cur-
rently driven has been judged and the vehicle mark has been repo-
sitioned.
Alternative routes will be shown in different order of priority, and
the incorrect road can be avoided if there is an error in distance
and/or direction.
They are of the same priority if two roads are running in parallel.
Therefore, the vehicle mark may appear on either of them alter-
nately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and con-
figuration of the road.
SEL686V

• Map-matching does not function correctly when a road on which


the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map SD card
or when road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road
pattern are different due to repair.
The map-matching function may find another road and position the
vehicle mark on it when driving on a road not present in the map.
Then, the vehicle mark may change to it when the correct road is
detected.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc-
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data
read from the map SD card is limited. Therefore, correction by
map-matching is not possible when there is an excessive gap
SKIA0613E

between current vehicle position and the position on the map.


GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

Revision: October 2015 AV-30 2016 Maxima NAM


NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
GPS (Global Positioning System) is developed for and is controlled
by the U.S. Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satel- A
lites (NAVSTAR), transmitting out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at an altitude of approximately 13,049 miles
(21,000 km).
B
The receiver calculates the travel position in three dimensions (lati-
tude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves
that four or more GPS satellites transmit (three-dimensional position-
ing). The GPS receiver calculates the travel position in two dimen- C
sions (latitude/longitude) with the previous altitude data if the GPS
receiver receives only three radio waves (two-dimensional position-
SEL526V
ing). GPS position correction is not performed while stopping the D
vehicle.

Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:


E
• In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes.
• The position of GPS satellite affects GPS detection precision. The position detection may not be precisely
performed.
• The position detection is not performed if GPS receiver does not receive radio waves from GPS satellites F
(inside a tunnel, parking in a building, under an elevated highway, etc.). GPS receiver may not receive radio
waves from GPS satellites if any object is placed on the GPS antenna.
NOTE: G
• The detection result has an error of approximately 32.81 ft (10 mt) even with high-precision three dimen-
sional positioning.
• There may be cases when the accuracy is lowered and radio waves are stopped intentionally because the
GPS satellite signal is controlled by the U.S. Trace Control Center. H

NAVIGATION INDICATOR
• When the navigation system is ON, the AV control unit transmits a meter display signal to the combination
meter via CAN communication. I
• The combination meter displays a navigation status on the combination meter (in the information display)
when receiving a navigation indicator signal.
J
COMPASS
• AV control unit acquires direction information from GPS antenna.
• AV control unit transmits direction information to combination meter via CAN communication.
• When direction information is acquired, combination meter displays it on information display. K

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-31 2016 Maxima NAM


TELEMATICS SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
TELEMATICS SYSTEM
TELEMATICS SYSTEM
TELEMATICS SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000012379201

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWNIA4104GB

TCU Input Signal (CAN Communication)

Transmit unit Signal name


ABS warning lamp signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
VDC warning lamp signal

Revision: October 2015 AV-32 2016 Maxima NAM


TELEMATICS SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Transmit unit Signal name
A
Door switch signal
BCM
Trunk switch signal
Combination meter Brake warning lamp signal B
Airbag diagnosis sensor unit Car crash information signal
Door lock status signal
BCM
Oil pressure switch signal C
Malfunctioning indicator lamp signal
ECM
Engine status signal
D
DESCRIPTION
The telematics system interacts with the NISSANCONNECTSM data center using GPS and GSM/GPRS tech-
nologies. The telematics control unit (TCU) can send messages to and receive commands from the NISSAN- E
CONNECTSM data center. This allows the NISSANCONNECTSM data center to monitor the vehicle and obtain
actual position coordinates and automatically detected events, as well as initiate certain services from outside
the vehicle. In addition, the vehicle operator can initiate services from inside the vehicle. F
NOTE:
For additional information on the Telematics system, refer to the NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER′S MANUAL.
TELEMATICS SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000012379203
G

If a malfunction occurs in the telematics system, TCU performs fail-safe activation according to the detected
malfunction. H

Detection item Telematics system operation in fail-safe mode DTC


CAN communication • Telematics system does not function. U1000 I
• Inform a NISSANCONNECTSM data center about abnormality.
TEL antenna • Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF. U1A07
(LED indicator turns ON 10 times when push the SOS call switch.) U1A08 J
• When operated a telematics system, inform that cannot be connected to
the NISSANCONNECTSM data center.
USB communication • Telematics system does not function. U1A05 K
• Inform a NISSANCONNECTSM data center about abnormality.
TCU Telematics system function stops. U1A01
• Telematics system function stops. U1A02 L
• When operated a telematics system, inform that cannot be connected to
the NISSANCONNECTSM data center.
Telematics switch • Telematics system does not function. (Only SOS call does not operate.) U1A0E M
(SOS call switch) • Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF. U1A0F
Microphone • Transmit an own vehicle position to the NISSANCONNECTSM data cen- U1A0B
ter. U1A0C AV
• Inform a NISSANCONNECTSM data center about abnormality.

Revision: October 2015 AV-33 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000012193737

• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts with multifunction switch operation, and the AV control unit per-
forms a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
• Perform a CONSULT diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start (e.g., the screen does not display
anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.).
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000012193738

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM


Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• The self-diagnosis mode performs diagnoses on the AV control unit connections between system compo-
nents. Then it displays the diagnosis results on the display.
• The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and
set values as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking,
modifying or adjusting generally requires human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judg-
ment automatically).
On Board Diagnosis Item

Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis.
Self Diagnosis
• Diagnoses the connections across system components.
The following check functions are available:
• Color tone check by color bar display, white display and black display
Display Diagnosis • Light and shade check by gray scale display
• Touch panel check
• Sensor sensitivity settings
Vehicle Signals Diagnosis of signals can be performed.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
ANC/ASC Allows for testing and adjustment of the ANC/ASC system.
The reception status of GPS can be confirmed.
Navigation* Display On/Off of the simulation menu of navigation.
The system malfunction is displayed. When the malfunctioning item is select-
Error Location Display ed, the time and place that the selected malfunction last occurred are dis-
played.
Confirmation/ The communication condition of each unit of NISSANCONNECTSM can be
Adjustment AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
The signal connected to camera control unit can be checked and the guiding
Camera Control Unit
line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be adjusted.
SXM Displays the information related to satellite radio.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erases the connection history of unit and error history.
Reset Settings Initializes the default data.
Version information of the following items is displayed:
• AV control unit
Version Information • BOSE amp.
• Combination meter
• Around view monitor control unit
Program Update Version of the AV control unit can be updated.
The received volume adjustment of hands-free phone and microphone
Hands-free Phone
speaker check can be performed.

METHOD OF STARTING
Revision: October 2015 AV-34 2016 Maxima NAM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the audio system OFF. A
3. Press the MENU button.

D
ALNIA1766ZZ

4. While menu button is pressed rotate the volume encoder left, E


right, and left. On each rotation, it should be at least 7 clicks.

ALNIA1767ZZ H

5. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/
Adjustment” can be selected. I
NOTE:
When a diagnostic screen is not displayed, press the “MENU” switch. And then, restart from the procedure of
Step 3.
J
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self Diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-diagnosis mode starts. K
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trou-
ble diagnosis.
L
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is completed. The unit names and the connection
lines are color-coded according to the diagnostic results.

Diagnosis results Unit Connection line M


Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow
AV
Unit malfunction Note Red Green

NOTE:
Control Unit (AV control unit) and BOSE Amp. are displayed in red. O
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated.
The symptom is AV control unit internal error. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined
P
according to the following order of priority: red > gray.

- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a component in the diagnosis result
screen.
Detection Range of Self-diagnosis Mode
• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line
between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of the AV control unit.

Revision: October 2015 AV-35 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check the applicable display with the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.
Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red.

Possible malfunction location / Action to


Screen switch Description
take
Check AV control unit power supply and
ground circuits.
Refer to AV-156, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Di-
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit agnosis Procedure".
Audio Head Unit
power supply and ground circuits. When detecting no malfunction in those
components, replace AV control unit.
Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
When either one of the following items are
detected:
• Sound signal circuits between BOSE • Malfunctioning speaker circuits.
amp. and each speaker are malfunction- • Malfunctioning front or rear microphone
BOSE Amp. ing. circuits.
• Sound signal circuits between BOSE • Replace BOSE amp. Refer to AV-194,
amp. and either front or rear microphone "Removal and Installation".
are malfunctioning.
• BOSE amp. malfunction is detected.

Possible malfunction location / Action to


Area with yellow connection lines Description
take
When either one of the following items are • Combination meter power supply and
detected: ground circuits.
• Combination meter power supply and Refer to MWI-50, "COMBINATION
Control Unit ⇔ Cluster ground circuits are malfunctioning. METER : Diagnosis Procedure".
• AV communication circuits between AV • AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and combination meter are control unit and combination meter are
malfunctioning. malfunctioning.
GPS antenna connection malfunctions de- GPS antenna
Navigation unit ⇔ GPS Antenna
tected. Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Satellite antenna connection malfunctions Satellite antenna
Audio Head Unit ⇔ XM Antenna
detected. Refer to AV-117, "Diagnosis Procedure".

CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode
indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted.
2. Select each switch on the “Confirmation/Adjustment Mode” screen to display the relevant trouble diagno-
sis screen. Touch the “MAP” to return to the initial "Confirmation/Adjustment Mode" screen.
Display Diagnosis
Confirmation of the AV control unit screen.

Revision: October 2015 AV-36 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

Item Description A
• Display 8 colors of following bars:
- White
- Yellow
B
- Cyan (Close to light blue)
Color Spectrum Bar - Green
- Magenta (Close to purplish red)
Display Settings
- Red C
- Blue
- Black
Gradation Bar Display 32 gradation gray-scale image to a screen.
D
White Display Display white screen.
• The function can check the presence of a circle indication and deviation from
where it should be while touching the touch panel. If you hit Map button you will be E
Touch Panel Response Check
taken to a trace screen. Here you can check the function of continuous gesture on
the screen. To back out of screen hit the map button.
Touch Panel Calibration • Allows you to recalibrate the touch screen panel.
F
Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and the signals recognized by the system.
G
AV control unit
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks
ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) H
Vehicle Speed Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
ON Parking brake is pressed
Parking Brake Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal. I
OFF Parking brake is released
ON Headlamp switch is ON.
Lights Signal Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
OFF Headlamp switch is OFF.
J
ON Ignition switch ON.
Ignition Signal —
OFF Ignition switch in ACC position.
Shift the selector lever to “R” posi- K
ON
tion.
Reverse Signal Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
Shift the selector lever to a position
OFF
other than “R” position. L
Speaker Test
Select “Speaker Test” to display the speaker diagnosis screen. Touch “Start” to generate a test tone in a
speaker. Touch “Next” to generate a test tone in the next speaker. Touch “End” to stop the test tones. M
ANC/ASC
Select Confirmation/Adjustment to access ANC/ASC settings
AV
Item Description
• Start-Next
Left Front Tweeter O
• Stop
• Start-Next
Front Center
• Stop
### Speaker test
• Start-Next P
RIght Front Tweeter
• Stop
• Start-Next
R-PSHELF R-WOOFER
• Stop

Revision: October 2015 AV-37 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Item Description
Status Displays software version for ANC, ASC, and Config Results
Setting Allows user to enable/disable ANC/ASC after connection diagnosis
ANC/ASC Connection diagnosis Displays the status of each signal acquisition route
Outputs the test tone imitating ANC ON/OFF. Active test function will be
Active test
available after the connection diagnosis.

Navigation

Item Description
Sensor Information The reception status of GPS can be confirmed.

Error Location Display


The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-Diagnosis” is
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation.
The error record displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of
the following points:
• Place of the error occurrence is represented by the longitude and latitude at the time an error occurred. If
current location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occurrence cannot
be located correctly.
• The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a up-and-down manner.
Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items.

Error item Applicable DTC Reference


CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 AV-109
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) U1010 AV-111
Mismatched configuration data stored U1223 AV-112
Amplifier temperature error U1231 AV-113
Steer. Angle Sensor calibration U1232 AV-114
GPS Antenna error U1244 AV-116
XM Antenna connection error : open
U1258 AV-117
XM Antenna connection error : short
Cluster connection error U1267 AV-119
Confirm user connection unit U12B7 AV-121
Radio Antenna error : open
U12BE AV-122
Radio Antenna error : short

CAN COMM Diagnosis

CAN COMM Monitor


• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (master unit) and each unit.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunc-
tion is detected. It increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle. The upper
limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.

Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
CMF Send Switch OK / UNKW OK / 0 – 39 / —
CMF Receive Bose AMP OK / UNKW OK / 0 – 39 / —

Revision: October 2015 AV-38 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past) A
CMF Receive AVM OK / UNKW OK / 0 – 39 / —
CMF Receive Meter OK / UNKW OK / 0 – 39 / —
B
CMF Receive Audio OK / UNKW OK / 0 – 39 / —

Camera Cont.
C
Item Description
Correct Draw Line of Rear View Camera The guiding lines in the rear view monitor can be adjusted.
Displays the current configuration data.
D
NOTE:
Check/Change Configuration
Refer to the following list for the items of the configuration adjust-
ment function: E
Reset Configuration Initializes the camera system configuration.
Camera System Type Sets the type of camera that is connected.

Configuration list
F
Setting (Default value)
Setting item
Direct adaptive steering models Vehicle speed sensitive P/S models
G
Predictive Course Lines With SBW Without SBW
Rear Coeff. K 1.37847 1.37847
Rear Coeff. F 0.0394 0.0394 H
Rear Coeff. P1 −0.24463 −0.24463
Rear Coeff. P2 0.07005 0.07005
I
Rear Coeff. C1 −0.00608 −0.00608
Rear Coeff. C2 −0.00001 −0.00001
Rear Coeff. D1 130.6 130.6 J
Rear Coeff. D2 −35 −35
Car Width 1822.9 1822.9
Rear Offset 3835.175 3835.175 K
Rear Height 581.589 581.589
Rear L/R Angle 0 0 L
Rear Up/Dn Angle 0 0
Rear Roll Angle 0 0
Bumper Rear Dist. 0 0 M
Bumper Rear Ax Dist 0 0
Max. Steering Angle 31.56 31.56
AV
Min. Turning Radius 1 1.47
Wheelbase 2850 2850
Total Length 4792 4792 O
Steering Gear Ratio 0.032 0.047
Tot.Width With Mirrors 0 0
P
SXM
SXM Mode Diagnosis

Item Description
Diagnostic Mode Display Display adjustment items to test satellite radio function.
External Diagnostic Mode Set in external diagnostic mode.

Revision: October 2015 AV-39 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV control unit memory. (Clear the records of
the unit that has been removed.)
Reset Settings

Item Description
Reset User Data Initializes the AV control unit.
Reset Configuration Initializes the configuration data.

Version Information
Version information of each control unit and switch is displayed.
Program Update
Version of the AV control unit can be updated.
Hands-Free Phone
The hands-free phone reception volume adjustment and microphone and speaker test functions are also
available.

Item Description
HF Vol. Adjustment The reception volume can be set in three steps: “Low”, “Standard” and “High”.
Voice Microphone Test The microphone audio can be directly connected to the speakers to perform a microphone test.
Onload model ID Displays the on board unit ID.

CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000012193739

APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT performs the following functions via the communication with the AV control unit:

Diagnosis mode Description


Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication
Self Diagnostic Result
circuit of the Multi AV system and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is inputted to the AV control unit can be performed.
Work support Steering angle sensor can be adjusted.
ECU Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked.
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing AV control unit.

SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT


• In CONSULT self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively.
• The current malfunction indicates “CRNT”. The past malfunction indicates “PAST”.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes, U1000, U1010, U1300 and U1310, are detected. The
counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
• Refer to AV-109, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Freeze Frame Data (FFD)
The following vehicle status is recorded when DTC is detected and is displayed on CONSULT.

Item name Display content


ODO/TRIP METER
(km)
Total driving distance (odometer value) upon DTC detection is displayed.
TOTAL DISTANCE
(km)

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items:
Revision: October 2015 AV-40 2016 Maxima NAM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system. A

Display item Display Vehicle status Remarks B


On Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
On Parking brake is applied. normal. C
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.
Block the light beam from the auto
D
On light optical sensor when the light
switch is ON.

ILLUM SIG Either of the following conditions:


• Light switch is OFF. E
Off • Expose the auto light optical sen- —
sor to light when the light switch is
ON.
F
On Ignition switch ON.
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in ACC position.
On Selector lever is in R position. G
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
REV SIG Selector lever is in any position other
Off normal.
than R.
H
WORK SUPPORT
Adjust the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.
CAUTION:
For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS actuator control I
unit side. Refer to BRC-248, "Work Procedure".

Item Description J
ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
K
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-41 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCU)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCU)
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000012477108

CAUTION:
After disconnecting the CONSULT vehicle interface (VI) from the data link connector, the ignition must
be cycled OFF → ON (for at least 5 seconds) → OFF. If this step is not performed, the BCM may not go
to “sleep mode”, potentially causing a discharged battery and a no-start condition.
CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the TCU.

Direct Diagnostic Mode Description


Ecu Identification The AV control unit part number is displayed.
Self Diagnostic Result The AV control unit self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The AV control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.
Work support The settings for AV control unit functions can be changed.
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of AV communication is displayed.
CAN Diag Support Mntr
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of TCU is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to AV-56, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR

Monitor Item [Unit] Description


HF TYPE [NO BT/] HF type is displayed.
AUDIO UNIT TYPE [NAVI/] AV control unit type is displayed.
CALL SWITCH TYPE [SOS/] Call switch type is displayed.
SPEAKER TYPE [INDRCT/] Speaker type is displayed.
ZONE [USA/] Vehicle zone is displayed.
CHANNEL [NISSAN/] Vehicle channel is displayed.
CAN COMM [GEN.3/] Communication generation type is displayed.
K-LINE [DISABLE/] K-line communication status is displayed.
AV COMM [ENABLE/] AV communication status is displayed.
VEHICLE TYPE [ENG/] Vehicle type is displayed.
ECHO CANCEL [TYPE 1/] Echo cancel type is displayed.
NOISE CANCEL [TYPE 1/] Noise cancel type is displayed.
TCU STANDBY TIME [2DAYS/14DAYS/30DAYS] TCU standby time is displayed.
SENSOR ANGLE X [4.0/] Sensor angle X is displayed.
SENSOR ANGLE Y [4.0/] Sensor angle Y is displayed.
SENSOR ANGLE Z [4.0/] Sensor angle Z is displayed.
SVTB [DISABLE/] SVTB status is displayed.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK [DISABLE/] Remote door lock status is displayed.
REMOTE START [DISABLE/] Remote start status is displayed.
NAD OUTPUT STATUS [On/Off] TCU activation is displayed.
ACN COMM SEQUENCE LOG [1–255] ACN communication sequence log is displayed.
SOS COMM SEQUENCE LOG [1–10] SOS communication sequence log is displayed.
SOS SW [OFF/] SOS switch status is displayed.

Revision: October 2015 AV-42 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCU)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
WORK SUPPORT
A
Conditions Description
SAVE VIN DATA VIN data saved in TCU is stored in CONSULT.
Off: TCU activation Off.
B
TCU ACTIVATE SETTING
On: TCU activation On.
WRITE VIN (SAVED DATA) VIN data from SAVE VIN DATA can be written to new TCU. C
WRITE VIN (MANUAL INPUT) VIN data can be manually written to new TCU.

CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR


Refer to LAN-14, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor". D

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-43 2016 Maxima NAM


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION


AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000012193740

TERMINAL LAYOUT

AWNIA4127ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

2 3 [Ignition switch ON]


Sound signal front LH (+) Output
(G) (R) • Sound output

SKIB3609E

3
— Sound signal front LH (−) — — —
(R)

4 5 [Ignition switch ON]


Sound signal rear (+) Output
(B) (W) • Sound output

SKIB3609E

5
— Sound signal rear (−) — — —
(W)
7
Ground ACC power supply Input [Ignition switch ACC] Battery voltage
(P)
9 8
Illumination control signal Input Headlamps ON Battery voltage
(R) (GR)
10
— Pre-amp. shield — — —
(Shield)

Revision: October 2015 AV-44 2016 Maxima NAM


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B

11 12 [Ignition switch ON] C


Sound signal front RH (+) Output
(B) (W) • Sound output

SKIB3609E D
12
— Sound signal front RH (−) — — —
(W)
19
E
Ground Battery power supply Input — Battery voltage
(Y)
21 Input/
— M-CAN low TRM — —
(LG) output F
22 Input/
— M-CAN high TRM — —
(SB) output
23 Input/ G
— M-CAN low — —
(LG) output
24 Input/
— M-CAN high — —
(SB) output H
25 Input/
— CAN low — —
(P) output
26 Input/ I
— CAN high — —
(L) output
NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies de- J
pending on the specification
(destination unit).
[Ignition switch ON]
28 Vehicle speed signal (8- K
Ground Input • When vehicle speed is approx. 40
(BG) pulse)
km/h (25 MPH)

L
JSNIA0012GB

Selector lever in R (reverse) Battery voltage


30 — M
Reverse signal Input Selector lever in any position other
(G) 0V
than R (reverse)
31 AV
Ground Ignition power supply Input [Ignition switch ON] Battery voltage
(BG)
32
— MR output Input — —
(P)
O
38
— Microphone shield — — —
(Shield)

39 40
Microphone signal Output While speaking into the microphone
(W) (B)

SKIB3609E

Revision: October 2015 AV-45 2016 Maxima NAM


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

46 48
Microphone signal Input While speaking into the microphone
(B) (Shield)

SKIB3609E

47
— Microphone power supply — — 5V
(B)
48
— Microphone signal ground — — —
(Shield)

49 51 AUX in jack sound signal [Ignition switch ON]


Input
(W) (B) LH • Sound output

SKIB3609E

50 51 AUX in jack sound signal [Ignition switch ON]


Input
(R) (B) RH • Sound output

SKIB3609E

51 AUX in jack sound signal


— — — —
(B) ground
52
— Aux in jack shield — — —
(Shield)
57
Ground Camera power supply Output [Ignition switch ON] 6.2 V
(R)
58
Ground Camera ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(B)

59 58 Camera image signal [Ignition switch ON]


Input
(W) (B) (with rear view camera) • Image is displayed.

SKIB0827E

Camera image signal


59 58 [Ignition switch ON]
(with around view cam- Input
(B) (B) • Image is displayed.
era)

SKIB0827E

60
— Camera shield — — —
(Shield)

Revision: October 2015 AV-46 2016 Maxima NAM


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
61 B
— V BUS signal — — —
(B)
63
— USB D- signal — — —
(G) C
64
— USB D+ signal — — —
(W)
65 D
— USB ground — — —
(R)
66
— USB shield — — —
(Shield) E
67
Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output AV control unit ON, FM-AM selected Battery voltage
(B)
68
— AM-FM main Input — — F
(B)
69
— AM-FM ground — — —
(Shield)
G
70
— FM sub Input — —
(B)
71 H
— FM sub ground — — —
(Shield)
[Ignition switch ON]
72 Satellite radio antenna
Ground Input • Not connected satellite antenna 5.0 V
(B) signal
connector
I

73 Satellite radio antenna


— — — —
(Shield) shield
J
[Ignition switch ON]
74
Ground GPS antenna signal Input • Not connected GPS antenna con- 5.0 V
(B)
nector
75 K
— GPS antenna shield — — —
(Shield)
76
— V BUS signal — — —
(B) L
78
— USB D- signal — — —
(G)
79 M
— USB D+ signal — — —
(W)
80
— USB ground — — —
(R) AV
81
— USB shield — — —
(Shield)
82 O
— V BUS signal — — —
(B)
84
— USB D- signal — — —
(G) P
85
— USB D+ signal — — —
(W)
86
— USB ground — — —
(R)
87
— USB shield — — —
(Shield)

Revision: October 2015 AV-47 2016 Maxima NAM


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
BOSE AMP.
Reference Value INFOID:0000000012377487

TERMINAL LAYOUT

AWNIA4128ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

1 2 Sound signal rear subwoofer [Ignition switch ON]


Output
(W) (G) RH (+) • Sound output

SKIB3609E

2 Sound signal rear subwoofer


— — — —
(G) RH (−)

3 4 Sound signal front door [Ignition switch ON]


Output
(P) (BG) speaker RH (+) • Sound output

SKIB3609E

4 Sound signal front door


— — — —
(BG) speaker RH (−)

5 6 Sound signal rear subwoofer [Ignition switch ON]


Output
(W) (G) LH (+) • Sound output

SKIB3609E

6 Sound signal rear subwoofer


— — — —
(G) LH (−)

Revision: October 2015 AV-48 2016 Maxima NAM


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
7 B
— Ground — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(GR)
8 Sound signal door speaker
— — — —
(W) LH (−) C
10 7
Battery power supply Input [Ignition switch OFF] Battery voltage
(SB) (GR)
11 7 D
Battery power supply Input [Ignition switch OFF] Battery voltage
(G) (GR)
12
— Ground — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(GR) E

F
13 8 Sound signal front door [Ignition switch ON]
Output
(P) (W) speaker LH (+) • Sound output

G
SKIB3609E

16 29 [Ignition switch ON]


Tweeter LH (+) Output
(P) (R) • Sound output
I

SKIB3609E

17 18 Sound signal center speaker


Output
[Ignition switch ON] K
(P) (R) (+) • Sound output

SKIB3609E
L

18 Sound signal center speaker


— — — —
(R) (−)
M

19 32 Sound signal door tweeter [Ignition switch ON] AV


Output
(W) (BG) (+) • Sound output

O
SKIB3609E

P
22 33 Sound signal rear door [Ignition switch ON]
Output
(LG) (Y) speaker LH (+) • Sound output

SKIB3609E

Revision: October 2015 AV-49 2016 Maxima NAM


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output

23 34 Sound signal rear door [Ignition switch ON]


Output
(G) (W) speaker RH (+) • Sound output

SKIB3609E

24 35 Sound signal door tweeter [Ignition switch ON]


Output
(G) (R) LH (+) • Sound output

SKIB3609E

29
— Tweeter LH (−) — — —
(R)
30
— Tweeter RH (−) — — —
(W)

31 30 [Ignition switch ON]


Tweeter RH (+) Output
(G) (W) • Sound output

SKIB3609E

32 Sound signal door tweeter


— — — —
(BG) RH (−)
33 Sound signal rear door
— — — —
(Y) speaker LH (−)
34 Sound signal rear door
— — — —
(W) speaker RH (−)
35 Sound signal door tweeter
— — — —
(R) LH (−)
40 Sound signal door tweeter
— — — —
(L) LH (−)
41
— Voice guidance signal (−) — — —
(W)
42
— Sound signal LH (−) — — —
(R)
43
— Sound signal RH (−) — — —
(W)
48
— Rear microphone signal (−) — — —
(B)
49 Front left microphone signal
— — — —
(G) (−)
51 Input/
— M-CAN low — —
(W) Output
52 Input/
— M-CAN low — —
(W) Output

Revision: October 2015 AV-50 2016 Maxima NAM


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
53 7 B
Ignition power supply Input [Ignition switch ON or ACC] Battery voltage
(P) (GR)

60 40 Front right microphone sig- [Ignition switch ON]


Input
(Y) (L) nal (+) • When inputting interior sound
D

SKIB3609E

61 41 [Ignition switch ON] F


Voice guidance signal (+) Input
(B) (W) • Sound output

SKIB3609E
G

H
62 42 [Ignition switch ON]
Sound signal LH (+) Output
(G) (R) • Sound output
I
SKIB3609E

63 43 [Ignition switch ON]


Sound signal RH (+) Output
(B) (W) • Sound output K

SKIB3609E
L

M
68 48 [Ignition switch ON]
Rear microphone signal (+) Input
(LG) (B) • When inputting interior sound

AV
SKIB3609E

69 49 Front left microphone signal [Ignition switch ON]


Input
(R) (G) (+) • When inputting interior sound
P

SKIB3609E

71 Input/
— M-CAN high — —
(B) Output
72 Input/
— M-CAN high — —
(B) Output

Revision: October 2015 AV-51 2016 Maxima NAM


BOSE AMP.
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
[Ignition switch ON]
0V
73 7 • When opened any doors.
Step lamp signal Input
(W) (GR) [Ignition switch ON]
12.0 V
• When closed all doors.

75 7 [Engine running]
Engine speed signal Input
(BG) (GR) • Idle speed

JMBIA0076GB

76 Input/
— M-CAN shield — —
(Shield) Output

Revision: October 2015 AV-52 2016 Maxima NAM


TCU
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
TCU
A
Reference Value INFOID:0000000012372822

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL B


NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items. C

Monitor Item Condition Value/Status


type1 D
type2
ECHO CANCEL This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
type3
type4 E
type1
type2
NOISE CANCEL This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored. F
type3
type4
Set at 14 days (default) 14DAYS G
Set at 2 days 2DAYS
TCU STANDBY TIME
Set at 30 days 30DAYS
H
No setting NON
When TCU activation is ON On
NAD OUTPUT STATUS
When TCU activation is OFF Off I
ACN COMM SEQUENCE LOG — —
SOS COMM SEQUENCE LOG — —
J
TERMINAL LAYOUT

M
AWNIA4097ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES AV

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
(Approx.)
O
Input/
+ – Signal name
Output
1 29
Battery power supply Input [Ignition switch OFF] Battery Voltage P
(W) (B)
2 29
ACC power supply Input [Ignition switch ACC] 12 V
(P) (B)
3 29
ACC output Output [Ignition switch ACC] 12 V
(P) (B)

Revision: October 2015 AV-53 2016 Maxima NAM


TCU
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
[Ignition switch ACC]
• When not illuminated LED lamp of 12 V
5 28 SOS switch LED sig- SOS switch
Input
(R) (B) nal [Ignition switch ACC]
• When illuminated LED lamp of 0V
SOS switch
6 Input/
— CAN high — —
(L) Output
7 Input/
— CAN low — —
(P) Output
10 29
Ignition signal Input [Ignition switch ON] 12 V
(BG) (B)
11
— Shield — — —
(Shield)

12 11 [Ignition switch ACC]


Microphone signal Output
(B) (Shield) • When inputting interior sound

SKIB3609E

16
— Microphone shield — — —
(Shield)

17 16 [Ignition switch ACC]


Microphone signal Input
(W) (Shield) • When inputting interior sound

SKIB3609E

18 16
Microphone VCC Input [Ignition switch ACC] 5V
(B) (Shield)
26 Input/
— M-CAN high — —
(SB) Output
27 Input/
— M-CAN low — —
(LG) Output
28
Ground Ground — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(B)
29
Ground Ground — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(B)

31 32 [Ignition switch ACC]


Sound signal (+) Output
(W) (B) • When inputting interior sound

SKIB3609E

32
— Sound signal (–) — — —
(B)

Revision: October 2015 AV-54 2016 Maxima NAM


TCU
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
[Ignition switch ACC] B
0V
37 28 • When pressing SOS switch
SOS call switch signal Input
(BG) (B) [Ignition switch ACC]
5V
• Except for above C
41
— USB V BUS signal Input [Ignition switch ON] —
(B)
43 Input/ D
— USB D- signal [Ignition switch ON] —
(G) Output
44 Input/
— USB D+ signal [Ignition switch ON] —
(W) Output E
45
— USB ground — — —
(R)
46
— Shield — — — F
(Shield)
47 Not connected TEL antenna con-
Ground TEL antenna signal Input 2.8 V
(B) nector.
G
48
— Shield — — —
(Shield)
49 Not connected GPS antenna con- H
Ground GPS antenna signal Input 2.8 V
(B) nector.
50
— Shield — — —
(Shield)
I
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000012372823

If a malfunction occurs in the telematics system, TCU performs fail-safe activation according to the detected J
malfunction.

Detection item Telematics system operation in fail-safe mode DTC K


CAN communication • Telematics system does not function. U1000
• Inform a INFINITI CONNECTION data center about abnormality.
TEL antenna • Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF. U1A07 L
(LED indicator turns ON 10 times when push the SOS call switch.) U1A08
• When operated a telematics system, inform that cannot be connected to
the INFINITI CONNECTION data center.
M
USB communication • Telematics system does not function. U1A05
• Inform a INFINITI CONNECTION data center about abnormality.
TCU Telematics system function stops. U1A01
AV
• Telematics system function stops. U1A02
• When operated a telematics system, inform that cannot be connected to
the INFINITI CONNECTION data center.
Telematics switch • Telematics system does not function. (Only SOS call does not operate.) U1A0E O
(SOS call switch) • Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF. U1A0F
Microphone • Transmit an own vehicle position to the INFINITI CONNECTION data cen- U1A0B
ter. U1A0C P
• Inform a INFINITI CONNECTION data center about abnormality.

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000012372824

If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-
tion priority chart.

Revision: October 2015 AV-55 2016 Maxima NAM


TCU
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

Priority Detected items (DTC)


1 U1A04: VIN UNFINISHED
2 • U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
• U1A01: INTERNAL ERROR (TCU)
• U1A02: TEL COMMUNICATION MODULE
• U1A05: USB COMM
• U1A07: TEL ANTENNA SHORT
3 • U1A08: TEL ANTENNA NO CONN
• U1A0B: MIC IN CONN
• U1A0C: MIC OUT CONN
• U1A0E: SOS SWITCH ON STUCK
• U1A0F: SOS SWITCH NO CONN

DTC Index INFOID:0000000012372825

DTC CONSULT display Reference


U1000 CAN COMM CIRC AV-109, "DTC Description"
U1A01 INTERNAL ERROR (TCU) AV-124, "DTC Description"
U1A02 TEL COMMUNICATION MODULE AV-125, "DTC Description"
U1A05 USB COMM AV-126, "DTC Description"
U1A07 TEL ANTENNA SHORT AV-128, "DTC Description"
U1A08 TEL ANTENNA NO CONN AV-129, "DTC Description"
U1A0B MIC IN CONN AV-131, "DTC Description"
U1A0C MIC OUT CONN AV-133, "DTC Description"
U1A0E SOS SWITCH ON STUCK AV-135, "DTC Description"
U1A0F SOS SWITCH NO CONN AV-137, "DTC Description"

Revision: October 2015 AV-56 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

WIRING DIAGRAM A
MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000012193742
B

AV

AANWA1369GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-57 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANWA1380GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-58 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANWA1381GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-59 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3973GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-60 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3974GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-61 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3975GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-62 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3976GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-63 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3977GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-64 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3978GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-65 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3979GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-66 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3980GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-67 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITHOUT BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3981GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-68 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
A
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000012193743

AV

P
AANWA1370GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-69 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANWA1383GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-70 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANWA1384GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-71 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANWA1385GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-72 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANWA1386GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-73 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3985GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-74 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3986GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-75 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3987GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-76 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3988GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-77 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3989GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-78 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3990GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-79 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3991GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-80 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3992GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-81 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3993GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-82 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3994GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-83 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3995GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-84 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3996GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-85 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV (WITH BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM)
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AANIA3997GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-86 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

BASIC INSPECTION A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000012193744
B

OVERALL SEQUENCE
C

JSNIA4482GB M

• Reference 1: Refer to AV-40, "CONSULT Function".


• Reference 2: Refer to AV-40, "CONSULT Function". AV
• Reference 3: Refer to AV-174, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
O
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items:
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc- P
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom a malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Inspection End.
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
Revision: October 2015 AV-87 2016 Maxima NAM
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
1. Connect CONSULT and perform a "Self Diagnostic Result" for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-40, "CONSULT
Function".
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below:
- Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data (FFD).
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the “Self Diagnostic Result”.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-40, "CONSULT Function".

>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-174, "Symptom
Table".

>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a "Self Diagnostic Result" for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the “Self Diagnosic Result”.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-88 2016 Maxima NAM


ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT
A
Description INFOID:0000000012402915

BEFORE REPLACEMENT B
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before
replacement.
NOTE: C
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” after
replacing AV control unit.
AFTER REPLACEMENT D
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, always perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order.
E
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000012402916
F

1.WRITE DOWN THE REGISTRATION CODE FROM THE NEW / REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT
On the replacement AV control unit’s label, locate and write down the G
registration code (1).

>> GO TO 2. H

AWNIA4080ZZ J
2.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT Configuration K
Perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to LAN-10, "Descrip-
tion".
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” after L
replacing AV control unit.

>> GO TO 3. M

3.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT


Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation". AV

>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT’S CONFIGURATION. O

1. Place the radio into Self Diagnostic mode. Refer to AV-34, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
2. Select “Confirmation/Adjustment”.
3. Select “Version Information”. P
4. If the “” matches the “ITM Part Number”, GO TO 5.
5. If the “” does not match the “ITM Part Number”, perform the “Factory Configuration Data Initialisation” from
the “Initialise Settings” menu under “Confirmation/Adjustment” to clear the factory configuration data.

>> GO TO 5.

Revision: October 2015 AV-89 2016 Maxima NAM


ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

5.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)


CONSULT Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write
vehicle specification. Refer to AV-94, "Work Procedure".

>> GO TO 6.
6.CLEAR DTC’S AND CHECK AV SYSTEM OPERATION.
1. Perform a “ Self Diagnostic Result” for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT.
2. Clear any DTC’s in Multi AV.
3. Verify operation of Multi AV system.

>> GO TO 7.
7.REGISTER THE REPLACEMENT AV CONTROL UNIT.
Perform AV control unit registration. Refer to AV-89, "Work Procedure".

>> Work End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-90 2016 Maxima NAM


ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCU
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCU
A
Description INFOID:0000000012471699

When TCU is replaced, TCU activation operation is required. Refer to AV-91, "Work Procedure". B
Preparation before activation operation
• Subscribe to telematics service
• Preregister user ID and password (can be performed from owner homepage) C
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000012471700

1.TURN TCU OFF D

CONSULT Work support


1. Select TCU ACTIVATE SETTING, then Start. E
2. Select Start, then select Off to turn OFF the TCU.
3. Select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.
4. Select TCU ACTIVATE SETTING, then Start.
5. Select Start, and confirm that Off is displayed in the Current status field. F
6. Select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.

>> GO TO 2. G
2.SAVE VIN DATA
NOTE: H
If the VIN data cannot be saved, it will have to be entered manually later in this procedure.
CONSULT Work support
1. Select SAVE VIN DATA, then Start.
2. Select Start to save the VIN data. I
3. Select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.

J
>> GO TO 3.
3.REMOVE TCU
Remove the TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation". K

>> GO TO 4.
4.RECORD TCU PART LABEL INFORMATION L

NOTICE:
Steps 4 and 5 must be performed after the original TCU has been removed from the vehicle and before the M
replacement TCU is installed.

Collect, record and have the following information ready: AV


• VIN.
• International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number of the original TCU. Located on the TCU part label.
• International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number of the replacement TCU. Located on the TCU part
label. O
• Serial number of the replacement TCU. Located on the TCU part label.

Revision: October 2015 AV-91 2016 Maxima NAM


ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCU
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

ALNIA1419GB

>> GO TO 5.
5.INSTALL TCU
Install the TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 6.
6.VIN DATA
Was the VIN data saved during step 2?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 8.
7.WRITE VIN DATA
CONSULT Work support
1. Select WRITE VIN DATA, then Start.
2. Select Start.
3. After the data writing has been completed, select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.

>> GO TO 10.
8.MANUALLY ENTER VIN DATA
CONSULT Work support
1. Select VIN REGISTRATION.
2. Enter the VIN number in the VIN (1ST TIME) field.
3. Enter the VIN number in the VIN (2ND TIME) field.
4. Select Start.
5. After the VIN registration has been completed, select End to return to the Work support Test Item screen.

>> GO TO 10.
9.REGISTER INTELLIGENT KEYS
For initialization and registration of Intelligent Keys, refer to CONSULT Immobilizer mode and follow the on-
screen instructions.

>> GO TO 10.
10.CONTACT SIRIUSXM CALL CENTER
NOTICE:

Revision: October 2015 AV-92 2016 Maxima NAM


ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TCU
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
This step must be performed to activate the replacement TCU. If this step is not performed, the TCU will not
be able to communicate with the NissanConnectSM Data Center. A

1. Call the SiriusXM call center. You will be asked for your name, dealer name, and the information collected
in step 4. The call center agent will deactivate the original TCU and activate the replacement TCU. B
2. Wait for the SiriusXM Call center agent to call back, confirming TCU registration.
NOTE:
This step may take 1–2 hours. C

>> GO TO 11.
11.TURN TCU ON D
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Press the hazard warning flasher switch and leave ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
4. Press and hold the telematics switch for more than 10 seconds.
5. After releasing the telematics switch, turn ignition switch ON.
6. Confirm the telematics switch LED indicator is turned ON. F
7. Press the hazard warning flasher switch to turn OFF.

>> GO TO 12. G
12.CONFIRM TELEMATICS OPERATION
Press the headset icon on the map screen to initiate a call.
H
Is the voice menu heard?
YES >> Work End.
NO >> GO TO 10.
I

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-93 2016 Maxima NAM


CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
Description INFOID:0000000012193747

Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing AV control
unit.
Configuration has three functions as follows.

Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
Before Replace ECU
Read / Write Configuration • Saves the read vehicle configuration.
After Replace ECU Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
Manual Configuration Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
NOTE:
Manual setting item: Items which need selection by vehicle specifications
Automatic setting item: Items which are written in automatically (Setting cannot be changed)
For some models and specifications, the automatic setting item may not be displayed.
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, always perform “Re/programming, Configuration” with CONSULT. If
not performed, AV control unit will not operate normally.
• Complete the procedure of “Read / Write Configuration” in order.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• Never perform “Read / Write Configuration” except for new AV control unit.
• If you set incorrect “Read / Write Configuration”, the AV control unit may not operate properly.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000012193748

1.WRITING MODE SELECTION


CONSULT Configuration
Select “Re/programming, Configuration” of MULTI AV.

When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.


When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OF “READ / WRITE CONFIGURATION”
CONSULT Configuration
Perform “After Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration”.

>> WORK END


3.PERFORM “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”
CONSULT Configuration
1. Select “Manual Configuration”.
2. Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to AV-95, "Configuration list".
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
if the setting is not correct.
NOTE:
If items are not displayed, touch “Next”. Refer to AV-95, "Configuration list" for written items and setting
value.
4. Touch “Next”.
5. Touch “OK”.
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “OK” even if the indicated configuration of brand new AV control unit is the
same as the desired configuration. If “OK” is not selected, configuration will not be complete.
6. Check that the configuration has been successfully written and touch “End”.

Revision: October 2015 AV-94 2016 Maxima NAM


CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

>> GO TO 4. A
4.OPERATION CHECK
Confirm that the AV control unit operates normally. B

>> WORK END


C
Configuration list INFOID:0000000012193749

CAUTION:
• Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally if D
the setting is not correct.
• The “setting value” of this vehicle is as follows: Never select any other value than the setting value
shown below. (If there is only 1 item in “setting value” that means that item is the only choice for this E
certain vehicle.)

SETTING ITEM
NOTE F
Items Setting value
BASE Without BOSE audio system
SOUND SYSTEM
BOSE With BOSE audio system G
NONE/AVM With around view monitor system
CAMERA SYSTEM
REAR With rear view monitor system
NORMAL Except HEV models
H
ENGINE TYPE
HYBRID HEV models
FF TYPE 4WD HEV models (AWD)
I
DRIVE SYSTEM FF TYPE HEV models (FWD)
WITHOUT Except HEV models
WITH With telematics system J
TELEMATICS
WITHOUT Without telematics system

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-95 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F01 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
B1F01 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012466913

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.

ENG SPEED SIG ERROR Signal (terminal) –


B1F01
(Engine speed signal error) Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connectors (Engine speed signal circuit)
• BOSE amp.
• ECM
FAIL-SAFE
Active noise control and active sound control function are deactivated
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If B1F01 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1010, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis)
for DTC U1000 or U1010.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable.
• U1000: Refer to AV-109, "DTC Description".
• U1010: Refer to AV-111, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Start engine and wait at least 30 seconds.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC B1F01 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-96, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012466914

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT OF ECM


With CONSULT
Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for detected DTC.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN BOSE AMP. AND ECM
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. connector B149 and ECM harness connector E10.
Revision: October 2015 AV-96 2016 Maxima NAM
B1F01 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
3. Check the continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector B149 and ECM harness connector E10.
A
BOSE amp. ECM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B
B149 75 E10 126 Yes
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. C
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND GROUND
Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and ground. D

BOSE amp.
Continuity E
Connector Terminal Ground
B149 75 No
Is inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND GROUND G

Check the voltage between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and ground.
H
Terminals
(+) Voltage
BOSE speaker amp. (−) (Approx.) I
Connector Terminal
B149 75 Ground 0V
J
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-194, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. K

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-97 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F02 DOOR STATUS SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
B1F02 DOOR STATUS SIGNAL
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012466915

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.

DOOR STATUS SIG ERROR Signal (terminal) –


B1F02
(Door status signal error) Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Harness or connectors (Door signal circuit)
• BOSE amp.
• BCM
FAIL-SAFE
Active noise control and active sound control function are deactivated
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If B1F02 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1010, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis)
for DTC U1000 or U1010.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable.
• U1000: Refer to AV-111, "DTC Description".
• U1010: Refer to AV-111, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Open the driver's door and wait at least 2 seconds or more.
5. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
6. Check DTC.
Is DTC B1F02 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-98, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012466916

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT OF BCM


With CONSULT
Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for detected DTC. Refer to BCS-53, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND BCM
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and BCM harness connector M21.

Revision: October 2015 AV-98 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F02 DOOR STATUS SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and BCM harness connector
M21. A

BOSE speaker amp. BCM


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B
B149 73 M21 21 Yes
Is inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND GROUND D
Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and ground.

BOSE speaker mp.


E
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B149 73 No
F
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. G
4.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND GROUND
Check the voltage between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and ground.
H

Terminals
(+) Voltage I
BOSE speaker amp. (−) (Approx.)

Connector Terminal
B149 73 Ground 0V
J

Is inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-194, "Removal and Installation". K
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-99 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F0B, B1F0C, B1F0D, B1F0E ANC MIC1 CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
B1F0B, B1F0C, B1F0D, B1F0E ANC MIC1 CIRCUIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000012476275

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front left microphone circuit is open (termi-
ANC MIC1 DISCONNECTED Signal (terminal)
B1F0B nal 69 or 49)
(Front left microphone open)
Threshold Front left microphone circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front left microphone circuit is shorted (ter-
ANC MIC1 SHORT Signal (terminal)
B1F0C minal 69 or 49)
(Front left microphone short)
Threshold Front left microphone circuit is shorted
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front left microphone circuit is shorted to
Signal (terminal)
ANC MIC1 SHORT TO POWER power (terminal 69 or 49)
B1F0D
(Front left microphone high) Front left microphone circuit is shorted to
Threshold
power
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front left microphone circuit is shorted to
Signal (terminal)
ANC MIC1 SHORT TO GND ground (terminal 69 or 49)
B1F0E
(Front left microphone low) Front left microphone circuit is shorted to
Threshold
ground
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “ANC” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC B1F0B, B1F0C, B1F0D or B1F0E detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-100, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012476276

1.CHECK FRONT LEFT MICROPHONE SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the signal between BOSE amp. harness connector B149 as per the following condition.

Revision: October 2015 AV-100 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F0B, B1F0C, B1F0D, B1F0E ANC MIC1 CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

BOSE amp. A
Terminals
Condition Reference value
Connector (+) (−)
B
Terminal

B149 69 49 When inputting interior sound


D

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal? E


YES >> Replace BOSE amp. Refer to AV-194, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND GROUND F

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. G
4. Check the voltage between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and ground.

H
Terminals
(+) Voltage
BOSE speaker amp. (−) (Approx.)
I
Connector Terminal
69
B149 Ground 0V J
49
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. K
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK FRONT LEFT MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect front left microphone (active noise control) harness connector R20.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and front left microphone
(active noise control) harness connector R20. M

BOSE speaker amp. Front left microphone (active noise control)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal AV
69 1
B149 R20 Yes
49 2
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
P
4.CHECK FRONT LEFT MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and ground.

Revision: October 2015 AV-101 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F0B, B1F0C, B1F0D, B1F0E ANC MIC1 CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

BOSE speaker amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
69
B149 No
49
2. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 terminals.

BOSE speaker amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminals
B149 69 49 No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front left microphone (active noise control). Refer to AV-200, "Removal and Installation -
Front".
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: October 2015 AV-102 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F10, B1F11, B1F12, B1F13 ANC MIC2 CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
B1F10, B1F11, B1F12, B1F13 ANC MIC2 CIRCUIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000012476277

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front right microphone circuit is open (termi-
ANC MIC2 DISCONNECTED Signal (terminal)
B1F10 nal 60 or 40) D
(Front right microphone open)
Threshold Front right microphone circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
E
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front right microphone circuit is shorted
ANC MIC2 SHORT Signal (terminal)
B1F11 (terminal 60 or 40)
(Front right microphone short) F
Threshold Front right microphone circuit is shorted
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON. G
Front right microphone circuit is shorted to
Signal (terminal)
ANC MIC2 SHORT TO POWER power (terminal 60 or 40)
B1F12
(Front right microphone high) Front right microphone circuit is shorted to H
Threshold
power
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON. I
Front right microphone circuit is shorted to
Signal (terminal)
ANC MIC2 SHORT TO GND ground (terminal 60 or 40)
B1F13
(Front right microphone low) Front right microphone circuit is shorted to J
Threshold
ground
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
K
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
L
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. M
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “ANC” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC B1F10, B1F11, B1F12 or B1F13 detected? AV
YES >> Proceed to AV-103, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End. O
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012476278

1.CHECK FRONT RIGHT MICROPHONE SIGNAL P

1. Turn ignition switch ON.


2. Check the signal between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 as per the following condition.

Revision: October 2015 AV-103 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F10, B1F11, B1F12, B1F13 ANC MIC2 CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

BOSE speaker amp.


Terminals
Condition Reference value
Connector (+) (−)
Terminal

B149 60 40 When inputting interior sound

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BOSE amp. Refer to AV-194, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND GROUND
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the voltage between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and ground.

Terminals
(+) Voltage
BOSE speaker amp. (−) (Approx.)

Connector Terminal
60
B149 Ground 0V
40
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK FRONT RIGHT MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front left microphone (active noise control) harness connector R19.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and front right microphone
(active noise control) harness connector R19.

BOSE speaker amp. Front right microphone (active noise control)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
60 1
B149 R19 Yes
40 2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK FRONT RIGHT MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and ground.

Revision: October 2015 AV-104 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F10, B1F11, B1F12, B1F13 ANC MIC2 CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

BOSE speaker amp. A


Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
60
B149 No B
40
2. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 terminals.
C
BOSE speaker amp.
Continuity
Connector Terminals
D
B149 60 40 No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front right microphone (active noise control). Refer to AV-200, "Removal and Installation - E
Front".
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
F

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-105 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F15, B1F16, B1F17, B1F18 ANC MIC3 CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
B1F15, B1F16, B1F17, B1F18 ANC MIC3 CIRCUIT
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000012476279

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Rear microphone circuit is open (terminal 68
ANC MIC1 DISCONNECTED Signal (terminal)
B1F15 or 48)
(Rear microphone open)
Threshold Rear microphone circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Rear microphone circuit is shorted (terminal
ANC MIC1 SHORT Signal (terminal)
B1F16 68 or 48)
(Rear microphone short)
Threshold Rear microphone circuit is shorted
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Rear microphone circuit is shorted to power
ANC MIC1 SHORT TO POWER Signal (terminal)
B1F17 (terminal 68 or 48)
(Rear microphone high)
Threshold Rear microphone circuit is shorted to power
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Rear microphone circuit is shorted to
Signal (terminal)
ANC MIC1 SHORT TO GND ground (terminal 68 or 48)
B1F18
(Rear microphone low) Rear microphone circuit is shorted to
Threshold
ground
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “ANC” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC B1F15, B1F16, B1F117 or B1F18 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-106, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012476280

1.CHECK REAR MICROPHONE SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the signal between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 as per the following condition.

Revision: October 2015 AV-106 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F15, B1F16, B1F17, B1F18 ANC MIC3 CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

BOSE speaker amp. A


Terminals
Condition Reference value
Connector (+) (−)
B
Terminal

B149 68 48 When inputting interior sound


D

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal? E


YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-194, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN BOSE SPEAKER AMP. AND GROUND F

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. G
4. Check the voltage between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and ground.

H
Terminals
(+) Voltage
BOSE speaker amp. (−) (Approx.)
I
Connector Terminal
68
B149 Ground 0V J
48
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. K
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK REAR MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect rear microphone (active noise control) harness connector R23.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and rear microphone (active
noise control) harness connector R23. M

BOSE speaker amp. Front left microphone (active noise control)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal AV
68 1
B149 R23 Yes
48 2
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
P
4.CHECK REAR MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 and ground.

Revision: October 2015 AV-107 2016 Maxima NAM


B1F15, B1F16, B1F17, B1F18 ANC MIC3 CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

BOSE speaker amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
68
B149 No
48
2. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B149 terminals.

BOSE speaker amp.


Continuity
Connector Terminals
B149 68 48 No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear microphone (active noise control). Refer to AV-200, "Removal and Installation -
Rear".
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: October 2015 AV-108 2016 Maxima NAM


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193750

DESCRIPTION B
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other C
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communica- D
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
E
CONSULT screen terms
DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON. F

CAN COMM CIRCUIT Signal (terminal) –


U1000
(CAN COMM CIRCUIT) Threshold –
G
Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
H
CAN communication system
FAIL-SAFE
The system using the CAN communication signal from control unit which cannot communicate does not func- I
tion
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY J

If DTC U1000 is displayed with DTC U1223, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis) for
DTC U1223.
K
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable DTC. Refer to AV-112, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2. L
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. M
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. AV
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1000 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-109, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193751 P

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN


CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-109, "DTC Description".

Revision: October 2015 AV-109 2016 Maxima NAM


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Is DTC detected again?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagno-
sis Flow Chart".
NO >> Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-110 2016 Maxima NAM


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193752

DESCRIPTION B
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other C
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communica- D
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
E
CONSULT screen terms
DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON. F

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Signal (terminal) -


U1010
[Control unit (CAN)] Threshold -
G
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
H
CAN communication system
FAIL-SAFE
The system using the CAN communication signal does not function I
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING J
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
K

>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE L

CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. M
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1010 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-111, "Diagnosis Procedure". AV
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
O
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193753

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN


P
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-111, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U1010 detected again?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-111 2016 Maxima NAM


U1223 CONFIG UNFINISH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1223 CONFIG UNFINISH
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193754

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.

CONFIG UNFINISH Signal (terminal) –


U1223
(Configuration unfinish) Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Configuration is incomplete
FAIL-SAFE
A function of AV control unit becomes mismatched with a vehicle specification and destination
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1223 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-112, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193755

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN


CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-112, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U1223 detected again?
YES >> Perform configuration of AV control unit. Refer to AV-94, "Work Procedure".
NO >> Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-112 2016 Maxima NAM


U1231 BOSE AMP.
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1231 BOSE AMP.
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193756

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.

AMP TEMP Signal (terminal) –


U1231
(Amp temperature) Threshold – D
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• BOSE amp. temperature is high
• BOSE amp.
FAIL-SAFE F
BOSE system does not function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. I
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1231 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-113, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193757 K

1.CHECK AROUND BOSE AMP.


L
Check whether there is any factor which causes a temperature rise near BOSE amp.
Was there any factor?
YES >> GO TO 2.
M
NO >> Remove factor.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
CONSULT AV
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-113, "DTC Description". O
Is DTC U1231 detected again?
YES >> Replace BOSE amp. Refer to AV-194, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End. P

Revision: October 2015 AV-113 2016 Maxima NAM


U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193758

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.

ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Signal (terminal) –


U1232
(Steering angle sensor calibration) Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Neutral position adjustment of the steering angle sensor is incomplete
• Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE
Predictive course line is not displayed
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1232 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-114, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193759

1.ADJUST NEUTRAL POSITION OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR


Adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on ABS actuator and electrical unit (control unit) side. Refer
to BRC-248, "Work Procedure".
NOTE:
When U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor.

>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-114, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U1232 detected again?
YES >> Replace steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-370, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-114 2016 Maxima NAM


U1234 AV CONTROL UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1234 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193760

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.

AV CONTROL UNIT Signal (terminal) –


U1234
(AV control unit) Threshold – D
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE E
AV control unit
FAIL-SAFE
F
As an example:
• Sound is not output by a speaker
• CD is not played G
• Radio does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H

CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
I
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
5. Check DTC. J
Is DTC U1234 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-115, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". K
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193761
L
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
CONSULT M
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-115, "DTC Description".
AV
Is DTC U1234 detected again?
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End.
O

Revision: October 2015 AV-115 2016 Maxima NAM


U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193762

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.

GPS ANTENNA CONN Signal (terminal) –


U1244
(GPS antenna connection error) Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• GPS antenna is not connected
• GPS antenna
FAIL-SAFE
The vehicle positions on a navigation screen differ
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1244 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193763

1.CHECK GPS ANTENNA HARNESS CONNECTOR


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Visually check GPS antenna connection.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-198, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair connection of GPS antenna to NAVI control unit.

Revision: October 2015 AV-116 2016 Maxima NAM


U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193764

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition C

Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.


Satellite radio antenna circuit is shorted D
Signal (terminal)
to ground (terminal 74)
1
Satellite radio antenna circuit is shorted
Threshold
to ground
XM ANTENNA CONN E
U1258 (Satellite radio antenna connection Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
error) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Satellite antenna signal is open (terminal F
Signal (terminal)
2 74)
Threshold Satellite radio antenna circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more G

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Satellite radio antenna is not connected H
• Harness or connector (Satellite radio antenna circuit is open or short)
FAIL-SAFE
Satellite radio is not received I
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE J
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds. K
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
5. Check DTC. L
Is DTC U1258 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-117, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". M
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193765

AV
1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Visually check satellite radio antenna and antenna feeder. O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. P
2.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA HARNESS CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit harness connector M167.
3. Check the continuity between AV control unit harness connector M167 and ground.

Revision: October 2015 AV-117 2016 Maxima NAM


U1258 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

Terminal
(+)
Continuity
AV control unit (−)
Connector Terminal
M167 74 Ground No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the voltage between AV control unit M167 and ground.

Terminal
(+) Voltage
AV control unit (−) (Approx.)

Connector Terminal
M167 74 Ground 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace satellite radio antenna. Refer to AV-196, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-118 2016 Maxima NAM


U1267 METER CONN
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1267 METER CONN
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193766

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
AV control unit CAN circuits (terminals 21
Signal (terminal)
METER CONN and 41) D
U1267 (Combination meter connection er- CAN communication circuits between AV
ror) Threshold control unit and combination meter are mal-
functioning
E
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
NOTE:
DTC U1267 is displayed with DTC U1300. F
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Combination meter
• AV communication circuit is open G
FAIL-SAFE
• Audio information is not displayed by the information display in the combination meter
• Navigation indicator is not displayed by the information display in the combination meter H
• Steering switch does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
I
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”. K
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1267 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-119, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193767 M

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


Check combination meter power supply and ground circuit. Refer to MWI-50, "COMBINATION METER : Diag- AV
nosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK M-CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT P
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit harness connector M163 and combination meter harness connector M23.
3. Check the continuity between AV control unit harness connector M163 and combination meter harness
connector M23.

Revision: October 2015 AV-119 2016 Maxima NAM


U1267 METER CONN
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

AV control unit Combination meter


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
23 49
M163 M23 Yes
24 50
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-68, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Revision: October 2015 AV-120 2016 Maxima NAM


U12B7 USB CONN
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U12B7 USB CONN
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193768

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.

USB CONN Signal (terminal) –


U12B7
(USB connection error) Threshold – D
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• AV control unit
• USB harness is not connected
FAIL-SAFE F
Audio equipment which is connected to USB does not operate
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Connect audio apparatuses, etc., to USB port. I
5. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
6. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12B7 detected? J
YES >> Proceed to AV-121, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193769

1.CHECK DTC (1) L


CONSULT
1. Remove connected audio apparatus from USB port.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds. M
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Erase DTC.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds. AV
6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
7. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”.
Is any DTC detected?
O
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC (2) P
1. Connect audio apparatus to USB port again.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
Is DTC U12B7 detected?
YES >> Abnormality of audio apparatus connected to USB port.
NO >> Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-121 2016 Maxima NAM


U12BE RADIO ANTENNA CONN
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U12BE RADIO ANTENNA CONN
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193770

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition

Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.


Radio antenna signal is shorted to
Signal (terminal)
ground (terminal 68)
1
Radio antenna circuit is shorted to
Threshold
ground
RADIO ANTENNA CONN
U12BE (Radio antenna connection er- Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more
ror) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Radio antenna signal is open (terminal
Signal (terminal)
2 68)
Threshold Radio antenna circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Radio antenna is not connected
• Harness or connector (Radio antenna circuit is open or shorted)
FAIL-SAFE
Radio is not received
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV”.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U12BE detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-122, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193771

1.CHECK WINDOW ANTENNA HARNESS CONNECTOR


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Visually check radio antenna and antenna feeder.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK ANTENNA HARNESS CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect AV control unit harness connector M165.
2. Check the continuity AV control unit harness connector M165 and ground.

Revision: October 2015 AV-122 2016 Maxima NAM


U12BE RADIO ANTENNA CONN
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

(+) A
AV control unit (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
B
M165 68 Ground Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. C
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
D
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the voltage between AV control unit connector M165 and ground.

E
(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal F
M165 68 Ground 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace antenna. Refer to AV-18, "Antenna and Antenna Feeder". G
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-123 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A01 TCU
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1A01 TCU
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012385871

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.

INTERNAL ERROR (TCU) Signal (terminal) –


U1A01
[Internal error (TCU)] Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
TCU
FAIL-SAFE
Telematics system function stops
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TCU” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A01 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-124, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012385872

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN


With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-124, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U1A01 detected again?
YES >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-124 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A02 TCU
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1A02 TCU
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012385873

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.

TEL COMMUNICATION MODULE Signal (terminal) –


U1A02
(TEL communication module) Threshold – D
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE E
TCU
FAIL-SAFE
Telematics system function stops F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds. H
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TCU” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC. I
Is DTC U1A02 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-125, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". J
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012385874

K
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. L
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-125, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U1A02 detected again? M
YES >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End.
AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-125 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A05 TCU
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1A05 TCU
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012385869

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
TCU USB circuits (terminals 41, 43, and
Signal (terminal)
1 44)
Threshold TCU USB circuits are shorted to ground

USB COMM Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more


U1A05
(USB communication) Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
TCU USB circuits (terminals 41, 43, and
Signal (terminal)
2 44)
Threshold TCU USB circuits are open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• USB harness connector
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE
Telematics system does not function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TCU” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A05 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-126, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012385870

1.CHECK USB HARNESS


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCU harness connector M193 and AV control unit harness connector M157.
3. Check the continuity between TCU harness connector M193 and AV control unit harness connectors
M157.

TCU AV control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
41 82
M193 43 M157 84 Yes
44 85
4. Check the continuity between TCU vehicle-side harness connector M193 and ground.

Revision: October 2015 AV-126 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A05 TCU
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

TCU A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
41 Ground
B
M193 43 No
44
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
D

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-127 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A07 TEL ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1A07 TEL ANTENNA
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012385865

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
TEL antenna circuit is shorted to ground
TEL ANTENNA SHORT Signal (terminal)
U1A07 (terminal 47)
(TEL antenna short)
Threshold TEL antenna circuit is shorted to ground
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Telematics antenna circuit (short or poor harness condition)
• Telematics antenna
FAIL-SAFE
Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF
(LED indicator turns ON 10 times when push the SOS call switch)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TCU” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A07 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-128, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012385866

1.TELEMATICS ANTENNA HARNESS INSPECTION


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCU connector M194.
3. Check the continuity between TCU harness connector M194.

(+)
TCU (-) Continuity
Connector Terminal
M194 47 Ground No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace telematics antenna. Refer to AV-202, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-128 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A08 TEL ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1A08 TEL ANTENNA
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012385867

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON

TEL ANTENNA NO CONN Signal (terminal) TEL antenna circuit is open (terminal 47)
U1A08
(Telematics antenna no connection) Threshold TEL antenna circuit is open D
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• Telematics antenna
• TCU
FAIL-SAFE F
Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF
(LED indicator turns ON 10 times when push the SOS call switch)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


With CONSULT H
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. I
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TCU” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A08 detected?
J
YES >> Proceed to AV-129, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012385868

1.CHECK TELEMATICS ANTENNA L


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect telematics antenna feeder harness connector.
3. Visually check telematics antenna and antenna feeder. M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. AV
2.CHECK TCU VOLTAGE
1. Disconnect telematics antenna harness connector M194.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. O
3. Check the voltage between TCU connector M194 and ground.

Voltage P
(+)
(Approx.)
(−)
TCU
Connector Terminal
M194 47 Ground 2.8 V
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: October 2015 AV-129 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A08 TEL ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
YES >> Replace telematics antenna. Refer to AV-202, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-130 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A0B MICROPHONE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1A0B MICROPHONE
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012385879

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
Microphone input circuit is shorted to
Signal (terminal)
ground (terminals 17) D
1
Microphone input circuit is shorted to
Threshold
ground
MIC IN CONN Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more E
U1A0B
(Microphone input connection)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
Microphone input circuit is open (termi-
Signal (terminal) F
2 nals 17)
Threshold Microphone input circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
G
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Sound signal circuit
• Microphone VCC signal circuit H
FAIL-SAFE
Transmit an own vehicle position to the center
I
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
J
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. K
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TCU” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0B detected? L
YES >> Proceed to AV-131, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End. M
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012385880

1.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT AV


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCU harness connector M173 and microphone connector R22.
3. Check the continuity between TCU harness connector M173 and microphone connector R22. O

TCU Microphone
Continuity P
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
16 2
M173 17 R22 1 Yes
18 4
4. Check the continuity between TCU harness connector M173 and ground.

Revision: October 2015 AV-131 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A0B MICROPHONE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

TCU
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
17
M81 No
18
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect TCU harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between TCU harness connector M173 and ground.

(+)
Voltage
TCU (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M173 17 Ground 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL
1. Connect microphone harness connector R22.
2. Check the signal between TCU harness connector M173 terminals.

TCU
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Connector
Terminals

When inputting interior


M173 17 16
sound.

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-199, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-132 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A0C MICROPHONE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1A0C MICROPHONE
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012385881

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
Microphone output circuit is shorted to
Signal (terminal)
ground (terminals 12) D
1
Microphone output circuit is shorted to
Threshold
ground
MIC OUT CONN Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more E
U1A0C
(Microphone output connection)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
Microphone output circuit is open (termi-
Signal (terminal) F
2 nals 12)
Threshold Microphone output circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
G
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Sound signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE H
Transmit an own vehicle position to the center
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TCU” using CONSULT. K
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0C detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-133, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012385882 M

1.CHECK SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUIT


AV
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCU connector M173 and AV control unit connector M163.
3. Check the continuity between TCU connector M173 and AV control unit connector M163.
O
TCU AV control unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
P
M173 12 M163 46 Yes
4. Check continuity between TCU connector M173 and ground.

TCU
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M173 12 No

Revision: October 2015 AV-133 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A0C MICROPHONE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL
1. Connect TCU connector M173 and AV control unit connector M163.
2. Check the signal between TCU connector M173.

TCU
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Connector
Terminals

When inputting interior


M173 12 11
sound.

SKIB3609E

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-134 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A0E TELEMATICS SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1A0E TELEMATICS SWITCH
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012385875

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
ECALL switch circuit is shorted to ground
SOS SWITCH ON STUCK Signal (terminal)
U1A0E (terminal 37) D
(SOS switch ON stuck)
Threshold ECALL switch circuit is shorted to ground
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOS call switch signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE F
• Telematics system does not function (Only SOS call does not operate)
• Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


With CONSULT H
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. I
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TCU” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0E detected?
J
YES >> Proceed to AV-135, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
K
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012385876

1.CHECK TELEMATICS SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT L


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect TCU harness connector M173 and telematics switch harness connector R21.
3. Check the continuity between TCU harness connector M173 and telematics switch harness connector M
R21.

TCU Telematics switch AV


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M173 37 R21 3 Yes
4. Check the continuity between TCU harness connector M173 and ground. O

TCU
Continuity P
Connector Terminal Ground
M173 37 No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK TCU VOLTAGE
Revision: October 2015 AV-135 2016 Maxima NAM
U1A0E TELEMATICS SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
1. Connect TCU switch harness connector M173.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage TCU harness connector M173 and ground.

(+)
Voltage
TCU (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M173 37 Ground 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace telematics switch. Refer to AV-203, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-136 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A0F TELEMATICS SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1A0F TELEMATICS SWITCH
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012385877

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis contents) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON

SOS SWITCH NO CONN Signal (terminal) ECALL switch circuit is open (terminal 37)
U1A0F
(SOS switch no connection) Threshold ECALL switch circuit is open D
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE E
SOS call switch signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE
• Telematics system cannot start F
• Telematics switch LED indicator turn OFF
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “TCU” using CONSULT. I
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1A0F detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-137, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012385878 K

1.CHECK TCU AND TELEMATICS SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect TCU harness connector M173 and telematics switch connector R21.
3. Check the continuity between TCU harness connector M173 and telematics switch connector R21.
M
TCU Telematics switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
AV
M173 37 R21 3 Yes
4. Check the continuity between TCU harness connector M173 and ground.
O
TCU
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M173 37 No P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK TCU VOLTAGE
1. Connect TCU harness connector M173.

Revision: October 2015 AV-137 2016 Maxima NAM


U1A0F TELEMATICS SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check the voltage TCU harness connector M173 and ground.

(+)
Voltage
TCU (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M81 37 Ground 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace TCU. Refer to AV-201, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace telematics switch. Refer to AV-203, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-138 2016 Maxima NAM


U1601, U1609 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1601, U1609 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012471701

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition C

Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.


Front door speaker LH circuit is shorted D
Signal (terminal)
to power or ground (terminal 13 or 8)
1
Front door speaker LH circuit is shorted
Threshold
to power or ground
E
FL-DOOR SPEAKER Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
U1601
(Front left-door speaker)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front door speaker LH signal is open F
Signal (terminal)
2 (terminal 13 or 8)
Threshold Front door speaker LH circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more G
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front door speaker RH circuit is shorted
Signal (terminal) H
to power or ground (terminal 3 or 4)
1
Front door speaker RH circuit is shorted
Threshold
to power or ground
FR-DOOR SPEAKER I
U1609 Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
(Front right-door speaker)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front door speaker RH signal is open J
Signal (terminal)
2 (terminal 3 or 4)
Threshold Front door speaker RH circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more K

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Front door speaker LH circuit is malfunction L
• Front door speaker RH circuit is malfunction
• Front door speaker LH
• Front door speaker RH
M
FAIL-SAFE
• No sound from front door speaker LH
• No sound from front door speaker RH
AV
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
O
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. P
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1601 or U1609 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-140, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-139 2016 Maxima NAM


U1601, U1609 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012471702

1.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. harness connector B110 and front door speaker LH or RH harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector B110 and front door speaker LH or RH har-
ness connector.
Front door speaker LH

BOSE amp. Front door speaker LH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
13 1
B110 D3 Yes
8 2

Front door speaker RH

BOSE amp. Front door speaker RH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
3 1
B110 D103 Yes
4 2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Check the continuity between front door speaker LH or RH harness connector and ground.
Front door speaker LH

(+)
Front door speaker LH (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
D3 Ground No
2

Front door speaker RH

(+)
Front door speaker RH (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
D103 Ground No
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the voltage between front door speaker LH or RH harness connector and ground.
Front door speaker LH

(+)
Voltage
Front door speaker LH (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1
D3 Ground 0V
2

Revision: October 2015 AV-140 2016 Maxima NAM


U1601, U1609 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Front door speaker RH

(+) A
Voltage
Front door speaker RH (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B
1
D103 Ground 0V
2
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace front door speaker LH or RH. Refer to AV-190, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
D

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-141 2016 Maxima NAM


U1603, U160B FRONT DOOR TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1603, U160B FRONT DOOR TWEETER
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012472936

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition

Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.


Front door tweeter LH circuit is shorted to
Signal (terminal)
power or ground (terminal 24 or 35)
1
Front door tweeter LH circuit is shorted to
Threshold
power or ground
FL-DOOR TWEETER Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
U1603
(Front left-door tweeter)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front door tweeter LH signal is open (ter-
Signal (terminal)
2 minal 24 or 35)
Threshold Front door tweeter LH circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front door tweeter RH circuit is shorted
Signal (terminal)
to power or ground (terminal 19 or 32)
1
Front door tweeter RH circuit is shorted
Threshold
to power or ground
FR-DOOR TWEETER Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
U160B
(Front right-door tweeter)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front door tweeter RH signal is open (ter-
Signal (terminal)
2 minal 19 or 32)
Threshold Front door tweeter RH circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Front door tweeter LH circuit is malfunction
• Front door tweeter RH circuit is malfunction
• Front door tweeter LH
• Front door tweeter RH
FAIL-SAFE
• No sound from front door tweeter LH
• No sound from front door tweeter RH
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1603 or U160B detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-143, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-142 2016 Maxima NAM


U1603, U160B FRONT DOOR TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012472937

A
1.CHECK FRONT DOOR TWEETER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. harness connector B109 and front door tweeter LH or RH harness connector. B
3. Check the continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector B109 and front door tweeter LH or RH har-
ness connector.
Front door tweeter LH C
BOSE amp. Front door tweeter LH
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
D
24 1
B109 D18 Yes
35 2

Front door tweeter RH E

BOSE amp. Front door tweeter RH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F
19 1
B109 D111 Yes
32 2
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR TWEETER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND H

Check the continuity between front door tweeter LH or RH harness connector and ground.
Front door tweeter LH I
(+)
Front door tweeter LH (−) Continuity
J
Connector Terminal
1
D18 Ground No
2 K
Front door tweeter RH

(+)
L
Front door tweeter RH (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
1 M
D111 Ground No
2
Is the inspection result normal?
AV
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR TWEETER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY O
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the voltage between front door tweeter LH or RH harness connector and ground.
Front door tweeter LH P
(+)
Voltage
Front door tweeter LH (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1
D18 Ground 0V
2

Revision: October 2015 AV-143 2016 Maxima NAM


U1603, U160B FRONT DOOR TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Front door tweeter RH

(+)
Voltage
Front door tweeter RH (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1
D111 Ground 0V
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door tweeter LH or RH. Refer to AV-189, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Revision: October 2015 AV-144 2016 Maxima NAM


U1626, U162E TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1626, U162E TWEETER
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012476202

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition C

Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.


Front tweeter LH circuit is shorted to D
Signal (terminal)
power or ground (terminal 16 or 29)
1
Front tweeter LH circuit is shorted to
Threshold
power or ground
E
F-INST L-TWEETER Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
U1626
(Front left-tweeter)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front tweeter LH signal is open (terminal F
Signal (terminal)
2 16 or 29)
Threshold Front tweeter LH circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more G
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front tweeter RH circuit is shorted to
Signal (terminal) H
power or ground (terminal 31 or 30)
1
Front tweeter RH circuit is shorted to
Threshold
power or ground
F-INST R-TWEETER I
U162E Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
(Front right-tweeter)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Front tweeter RH signal is open (terminal J
Signal (terminal)
2 31 or 30)
Threshold Front tweeter RH circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more K

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Tweeter LH circuit is malfunction L
• Tweeter RH circuit is malfunction
• Tweeter LH
• Tweeter RH
M
FAIL-SAFE
• No sound from tweeter LH
• No sound from tweeter RH
AV
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
O
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. P
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1626 or U162E detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-146, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-145 2016 Maxima NAM


U1626, U162E TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012476203

1.CHECK TWEETER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. harness connector B109 and tweeter LH or RH harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector B109 and tweeter LH or RH harness con-
nector.
Tweeter LH

BOSE amp. Tweeter LH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
16 1
B109 M143 Yes
29 2

Tweeter RH

BOSE amp. Tweeter RH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
31 1
B109 M144 Yes
30 2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK TWEETER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Check the continuity between tweeter LH or RH harness connector and ground.
Tweeter LH

(+)
Tweeter LH (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
N143 Ground No
2

Tweeter RH

(+)
Tweeter RH (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
M144 Ground No
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK TWEETER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the voltage between TWEETER LH or RH harness connector and ground.
Tweeter LH

(+)
Voltage
Tweeter LH (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1
M143 Ground 0V
2

Revision: October 2015 AV-146 2016 Maxima NAM


U1626, U162E TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Tweeter RH

(+) A
Voltage
Tweeter RH (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B
1
M144 Ground 0V
2
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace tweeter LH or RH. Refer to AV-187, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
D

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-147 2016 Maxima NAM


U162A CENTER SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U162A CENTER SPEAKER
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012476204

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition

Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.


Center speaker circuit is shorted to pow-
Signal (terminal)
er or ground (terminal 17 or 18)
1
Center speaker circuit is shorted to pow-
Threshold
er or ground
F-INST C-SPEAKER Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
U162A
(Center speaker)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Center speaker signal is open (terminal
Signal (terminal)
2 17 or 18)
Threshold Center speaker circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Center speaker circuit is malfunction
• Center speaker
FAIL-SAFE
No sound from front center squawker
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U162A detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-148, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012476205

1.CHECK FRONT CENTER SQUAWKER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. harness connector B109 and center speaker harness connector M301.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector B109 and center speaker harness connec-
tor M301.

BOSE amp. Center speaker


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
17 1
B109 M301 Yes
18 2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Revision: October 2015 AV-148 2016 Maxima NAM
U162A CENTER SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND A

Check the continuity between center speaker harness connector M301 and ground.
B
(+)
Center speaker (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal C
1
M301 Ground No
2
D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. E
3.CHECK CENTER SPEAKER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the voltage between center speaker harness connector M301 and ground. F

(+)
Voltage G
Center speaker (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1 H
M301 Ground 0V
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace center speaker. Refer to AV-188, "Removal and Installation". I
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-149 2016 Maxima NAM


U170A, U170E REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U170A, U170E REAR DOOR SPEAKER
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012476206

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition

Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.


Rear door speaker LH circuit is shorted
Signal (terminal)
to power or ground (terminal 22 or 33)
1
Rear door speaker LH circuit is shorted
Threshold
to power or ground
RL-DOOR SPEAKER Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
U170A
(Rear left-door speaker)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Rear door speaker LH signal is open (ter-
Signal (terminal)
2 minal 22 or 33)
Threshold Rear door speaker LH circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Rear door speaker RH circuit is shorted
Signal (terminal)
to power or ground (terminal 23 or 34)
1
Rear door speaker RH circuit is shorted
Threshold
to power or ground
RR-DOOR SPEAKER Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
U170E
(Rear right-door speaker)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Rear door speaker RH signal is open
Signal (terminal)
2 (terminal 23 or 34)
Threshold Rear door speaker RH circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Rear door speaker LH circuit is malfunction
• Rear door speaker RH circuit is malfunction
• Rear door speaker LH
• Rear door speaker RH
FAIL-SAFE
• No sound from rear door speaker LH
• No sound from rear door speaker RH
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U170A or U170E detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-151, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-150 2016 Maxima NAM


U170A, U170E REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012476207

A
1.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B109 and rear door speaker LH or RH harness con- B
nector.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B109 and rear door speaker LH or
RH harness connector. C
Rear door speaker LH

BOSE speaker amp. Rear door speaker LH


Continuity D
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
22 1
B109 D202 Yes
33 2 E
Rear door speaker RH

BOSE speaker amp. Rear door speaker RH


Continuity F
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
23 1
B109 D302 Yes
34 2 G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. H
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Check the continuity between rear door speaker LH or RH harness connector and ground. I
Rear door speaker LH

(+)
Rear door speaker LH (−) Continuity
J
Connector Terminal
1
D202 Ground No K
2

Rear door speaker RH


L
(+)
Rear door speaker RH (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal M
1
D302 Ground No
2
Is the inspection result normal? AV
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY O

1. Turn ignition switch ON.


2. Check the voltage between rear door speaker LH or RH harness connector and ground. P

Revision: October 2015 AV-151 2016 Maxima NAM


U170A, U170E REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Rear door speaker LH

(+)
Voltage
Rear door speaker LH (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1
D202 Ground 0V
2

Rear door speaker RH

(+)
Voltage
Rear door speaker RH (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1
D302 Ground 0V
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door speaker LH or RH. Refer to AV-191, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Revision: October 2015 AV-152 2016 Maxima NAM


U1721, U1729 REAR SUBWOOFER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
U1721, U1729 REAR SUBWOOFER
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012476211

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. (Trouble diagnosis content) DTC detection condition C

Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.


Rear subwoofer LH circuit is shorted to D
Signal (terminal)
power or ground (terminal 5 or 6)
1
Rear subwoofer LH circuit is shorted to
Threshold
power or ground
E
RL-PSHELF SUBWOOFER Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
U1721
(Rear left-subwoofer)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Rear subwoofer LH signal is open (termi- F
Signal (terminal)
2 nal 5 or 6)
Threshold Rear subwoofer LH circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more G
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Rear subwoofer RH circuit is shorted to
Signal (terminal) H
power or ground (terminal 1 or 2)
1
Rear subwoofer RH circuit is shorted to
Threshold
power or ground
RR-PSHELF SUBWOOFER I
U1729 Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
(Rear right-subwoofer)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON.
Rear subwoofer RH signal is open (termi- J
Signal (terminal)
2 nal 1 or 2)
Threshold Rear subwoofer RH circuit is open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more K

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Rear satellite speaker LH circuit is malfunction L
• Rear satellite speaker RH circuit is malfunction
• Rear satellite speaker LH
• Rear satellite speaker RH
M
FAIL-SAFE
• No sound from rear satellite speaker LH
• No sound from rear satellite speaker RH
AV
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
O
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more. P
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “MULTI AV” using CONSULT.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1722 or U172A detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-154, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END

Revision: October 2015 AV-153 2016 Maxima NAM


U1721, U1729 REAR SUBWOOFER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012476212

1.CHECK REAR SUBWOOFER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. harness connector B110 and rear subwoofer LH or RH harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector B110 and rear subwoofer LH or RH harness
connector.
Rear subwoofer LH

BOSE amp. Rear subwoofer LH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
5 1
B110 B106 Yes
6 2

Rear subwoofer RH

BOSE amp. Rear subwoofer RH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
1 1
B110 B107 Yes
2 2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK REAR SUBWOOFER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Check the continuity between rear subwoofer LH or RH harness connector and ground.
Rear subwoofer LH

(+)
Rear subwoofer LH (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
B106 Ground No
2

Rear subwoofer RH

(+)
Rear subwoofer RH (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
B107 Ground No
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK REAR SUBWOOFER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the voltage between rear subwoofer LH or RH harness connector and ground.
Rear subwoofer LH

(+)
Voltage
Rear subwoofer LH (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1
B106 Ground 0V
2

Revision: October 2015 AV-154 2016 Maxima NAM


U1721, U1729 REAR SUBWOOFER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Rear subwoofer RH

(+) A
Voltage
Rear subwoofer RH (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B
1
B107 Ground 0V
2
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace rear subwoofer LH or RH. Refer to AV-192, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
D

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-155 2016 Maxima NAM


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193772

1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check that the following fuse is not blown:

Power source Fuse No. Capacity


Battery 15 20 A
Ignition switch ACC or ON (with Telematics
21 10 A
system)
Ignition switch ON or START 30 10 A
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit harness connector M162.
3. Check the voltage between AV control unit harness connector M162 and ground.

(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M162 19 Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply circuit.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the voltage between AV control unit harness connector M163 and ground.

(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M163 7 Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for accessory power supply circuit.
4.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT IGNITION POWER SUPPLY
1. Check the voltage between AV control unit harness connector M163 and ground.

(+)
Voltage
AV control unit (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M163 31 Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: October 2015 AV-156 2016 Maxima NAM


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for accessory power supply circuit. A
5.CHECK CASE GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
B
2. Check the continuity between AV control unit case and ground.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
C
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
BOSE AMP.
BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193773
D

1.CHECK FUSE
E
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check that the following fuse is not blown:

Power source Fuse No. Capacity


F

11 15 A
Battery
12 15 A G
Ignition switch ACC or ON (without telematics system) 21 10 A
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit. H
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BOSE AMP. BATTERY POWER SUPPLY I
Check the voltage between BOSE amp. harness connector B110 and ground.

(+) J
Voltage
BOSE amp. (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
K
10
B110 Ground Battery voltage
11
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for battery power supply circuit.
3.CHECK BOSE AMP. IGNITION POWER SUPPLY M
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. harness connector B120.
3. Check the continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector B120 and ground. AV

(+)
Voltage O
BOSE amp. (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B120 53 Ground Battery voltage P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply circuit.
4.CHECK BOSE AMP. GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BOSE amp. harness connector B110.

Revision: October 2015 AV-157 2016 Maxima NAM


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
3. Check the continuity between BOSE amp. harness connector B110 and ground.

(+)
BOSE amp. (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
7
B110 Ground Yes
12
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
TCU
TCU : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012385859

1.CHECK FUSE
Check if the fuse is burned out.

Power source Fuse No. Capacity


Battery 15 20 A
Ignition switch ACC or ON 21 10 A
Ignition switch ON or START 30 10 A
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the fuse after repairing the applicable circuit.
2.CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
Check the voltage between the TCU harness connector M173 and ground.

(+)
Voltage
TCU (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M173 1 Ground Battery Voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between TCU and fuse.
3.CHECK ACC POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON.
2. Disconnect TCU harness connector M173.
3. Check the continuity between TCU harness connector M173 and ground.

(+)
Voltage
TCU (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M173 2 Ground Battery Voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness between TCU and fuse.
4.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON or START.

Revision: October 2015 AV-158 2016 Maxima NAM


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
2. Disconnect TCU harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between TCU harness connector M173 and ground. A

(+)
Voltage B
TCU (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M173 10 Ground Battery Voltage
C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. D
5.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON or START.
2. Disconnect TCU harness connector. E
3. Check the continuity between TCU harness connector M173 and ground.

TCU F
(+) (−) Continuity
TCU (+)
G
M173 10 Ground Yes
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End. H
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-159 2016 Maxima NAM


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193774

1.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the signal between AV control unit harness connector M163 per the following condition:

AV control unit
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Connector
Terminal

M163 46 47 Give a voice.

PKIB5037J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VOLTAGE MICROPHONE VCC
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect microphone harness connector R22.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check the voltage between microphone harness connector R22.

Microphone
Voltage
(+) (−)
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
R22 4 1 5.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-199, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MICROPHONE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Disconnect AV control unit harness connector M163.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector M163 and microphone harness connector
R22.

AV control unit Microphone


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
46 1
M163 47 R22 4 Yes
48 2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK MICROPHONE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check the continuity between AV control unit harness connector M163 and ground.

Revision: October 2015 AV-160 2016 Maxima NAM


MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

(+) A
AV control unit (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
B
46
M163 Ground No
47
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
D

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-161 2016 Maxima NAM


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012416906

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-57, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M160 and suspected front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M160 and suspected front door speaker connector.

AV control unit Front door speaker


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
2 1
D3 (LH)
3 2
M160 Yes
11 1
D103 (RH)
12 2
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M160 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M160 — No
11
12
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect audio unit connector M160 and suspected front door speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push audio unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between audio unit connector M160 and ground.

AV control unit connector M160


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: October 2015 AV-162 2016 Maxima NAM


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
2 3
A

Audio signal output


11 12 B

SKIB3609E

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door speaker. Refer to AV-190, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
D

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-163 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012416908

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-57, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M160 and suspected rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M160 and suspected rear door speaker connector.

AV control unit Rear door speaker


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
4 1
D202 (LH)
5 2
M160 Yes
13 1
D302 (RH)
14 2
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M160 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M160 — No
13
14
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M160 and suspected rear door speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push audio unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between AV control unit connector M160 and ground.

AV control unit connector M160


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: October 2015 AV-164 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
4 5
A

Audio signal output


13 14 B

SKIB3609E

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-191, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
D

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-165 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
REAR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012476347

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-57, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M160 and suspected rear speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M160 and suspected rear speaker connector.

AV control unit Rear door speaker


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
4 1
B73 (LH)
5 2
M160 Yes
13 1
B72 (RH)
14 2
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M160 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M160 — No
13
14
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M160 and suspected rear speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push audio unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between AV control unit connector M160 and ground.

AV control unit connector M160


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: October 2015 AV-166 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR SPEAKER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
4 5
A

Audio signal output


13 14 B

SKIB3609E

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear speaker. Refer to AV-192, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
D

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-167 2016 Maxima NAM


TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
TWEETER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012435139

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, BOSE speaker amp., speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M162 and suspected tweeter connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and suspected tweeter connector.

AV control unit Tweeter


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
2 1
M143 (LH)
3 2
M162 Yes
11 1
M144 (RH)
12 2
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M162 and ground.

AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M162 — No
11
12
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK TWEETER SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M162 and suspected tweeter connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push audio unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between AV control unit connector M162 and ground.

AV control unit connector M162


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

Revision: October 2015 AV-168 2016 Maxima NAM


TWEETER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
2 3
A

Audio signal output


11 12 B

SKIB3609E

C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace tweeter. Refer to AV-187, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
D

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-169 2016 Maxima NAM


STEERING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
STEERING SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012416911

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-57, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH RESISTANCE


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect combination switch connector M149.
3. Check resistance between combination switch connector terminals.

Combination switch connector M149 Resistance Ω


Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.)

Depress SOURCE switch. 1

Depress switch. 121

16 Depress switch. 321

Depress switch. 723

Depress ENTER switch. 2023


19
Depress switch. 1

Depress switch. 121


17 321
Depress switch.

Depress switch. 723

Depress DISP switch. 2023


Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace steering switches. Refer to AV-184, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND COMBINATION METER
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and combination switch connector M30.

Combination meter Combination switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
21 11
M23 22 M30 9 Yes
23 8
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M24 and ground.

Combination meter
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
21
M24 22 — No
23
Is the inspection result normal?

Revision: October 2015 AV-170 2016 Maxima NAM


STEERING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. A
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
Check continuity between combination switch connectors M30 and M149.
B

Combination switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
8 17
M30 9 M149 16 Yes
11 19
D

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 4. E
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-16, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND AUDIO UNIT
1. Disconnect AV control connector M163. F
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector M23 and AV control unit connector M163.

Combination meter Audio unit G


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
49 23
M23 M163 Yes H
50 24
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector M23 and ground.
I
Combination meter
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
J
49
M23 — No
50
Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
L

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-171 2016 Maxima NAM


USB CONNECTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
USB CONNECTOR
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012435134

Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-57, "Wiring Diagram".

1.CHECK FRONT USB INTERFACE HARNESS CONTINUITY


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M164, or M158, and USB interface-1 connector M190, or USB interface-
2 connector M191.
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M164, or M158, and USB interface-1 connector M190, or
USB interface-2 connector M191.

Audio unit Front USB interfaces


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
61 1
63 3
M164 64 M190 (USB interface-1) 4 Yes
65 5
66 6
76 1
78 3
M158 79 M191 (USB interface-2) 4 Yes
80 5
81 6
4. Check continuity between audio unit connector M164, or M158, and ground.

Audio unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
63
M164 Ground No
64
84
M158 Ground No
85
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the front USB interface. Refer to AV-186, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

Revision: October 2015 AV-172 2016 Maxima NAM


AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012416913

B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-57, "Wiring Diagram".

C
1.CHECK AUX IN JACK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163 and AUX in jack connector M172. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 and AUX in jack connector M172.

AV control unit AUX in jack E


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
49 1
F
M163 50 M172 4 Yes
51 3
4. Check continuity between audio unit connector M163 and ground. G

AV control unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal H
49
M163 Ground No
50
I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the AUX in jack. Refer to AV-186, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. J

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-173 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000012193775

RELATED TO NAVIGATION

Symptom Check items Probable malfunction location


“Map data cannot be read. Please con-
MAP is not displayed Check whether SD card is inserted correctly.
firm~” is displayed on the screen.
There is a malfunction in the CONSULT
“Self-Diagnostic Result” of “MULTI AV”. Perform detected DTC diagnosis.
Refer to AV-40, "CONSULT Function".
Fuel economy display or vehicle
setting operation is abnormal. There is no malfunction in the CON-
SULT “Self-diagnostic Results” of Ignition signal circuit malfunction.
“MULTI AV”. Refer to EC-555, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Refer to AV-40, "CONSULT Function".
On the setting display, select “system
Guide sound is not heard or too
sound (guide sound volume, etc.)” and Voice guidance signal circuit malfunction.
low.
confirm that guide sound is ON.

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE


• Before performing diagnosis, confirm that the cellular phone being used by the customer is compatible with
the vehicle.
• It is possible that a malfunction is occurring due to a version change of the phone even though the phone is
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and
checking that it operates normally. It is important to determine whether the cause of the malfunction is the
vehicle or the cellular phone.
Check Compatibility
1. Make sure the customer's Bluetooth® related concern is understood.
2. Verify the customer's concern.
NOTE:
The customer's phone may be required, depending upon their concern.
3. Write down the customer's phone brand, model, and service provider.
NOTE:
It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with
one provider but may not be on the approved list with other providers.
4. Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”.
a. Using the website's search engine, find out if the customer's phone is on the approved list.
b. If the customer's phone is NOT on the approved list:
Stop diagnosis here. The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth® phone that is on the approved list before
any further action.
c. If the feature related to the customer's concern shows as “N” (not compatible):
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function, they will need to get an approved
phone showing the feature as “Y” (compatible) in the “Basic Features” list.
d. If the feature related to the customer's concern shows as “Y” (compatible):
Perform diagnosis as per the following table:

Revision: October 2015 AV-174 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

Symptom Check items Probable malfunction location A


Does not recognize cellular
phone connection. (No con-
Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
nection is displayed on the dis-
B
play at the guide.)
• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot
be established. AV control unit malfunction.
C
Hands-free phone cannot be
• Hands-free phone operation can be Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and
established.
performed; however, voice between Installation".
each other cannot be heard during the
conversation.
D
Check the “Voice Microphone Test” in
The other party's voice cannot
Confirmation/Adjustment mode if sound is
be heard by hands-free phone. E
heard.

Originating sound is not heard Sound operation function is normal.


by the other party with hands- Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
free phone communication. Sound operation function does not work. F
Refer to AV-160, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switches ”VOL UP”, “VOL
Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
DOWN” and, “ ” switches work, but
Refer to AV-170, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
“ ” switch does not work.
The system cannot be operat-
ed. • The voice recognition can be controlled.
• Steering switch “ ” switch work, but Steering switch signal B circuit malfunction.
H
”VOL UP”, “VOL DOWN” and, “ ”, Refer to AV-170, "Diagnosis Procedure".
switches do not work.

RELATED TO AUDIO I

Symptom Check items Probable malfunction location


Replace the AV Control Unit. J
The disk cannot be removed. —
Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
Without BOSE system:
• Sound signal circuit malfunction. K
Refer to AV-113, "Diagnosis Procedure".
With BOSE system:
No sound comes out or the lev- No sound from all speakers. • Sound signal circuit malfunction.
el of the sound is low. Refer to AV-157, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure".
L
• BOSE amp. power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
tion. Refer to AV-157, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Proce-
dure". M
Sound is not heard from woofer. Sound signal (woofer) circuit malfunction.

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-175 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Symptom Check items Probable malfunction location
Without BOSE system:
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
Noise comes from all speakers. With BOSE system:
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
• Malfunction in BOSE amp.
Without BOSE system:
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction.
• Malfunction in speaker.
• Poor installation of speaker (e.g. backlash and loose-
ness).
• Malfunction in display control unit.
Noise is mixed with audio. Noise comes only from a certain speaker • Malfunction in AV control unit.
(front right, front left, rear right, or rear With BOSE system:
left). • Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction.
Refer to AV-157, "BOSE AMP. : Diagnosis Procedure".
• Malfunction in speaker.
• Poor installation of speaker (e.g. backlash and loose-
ness)
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
• Malfunction in BOSE amp.
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the
car hits a bump or while driving over bad Poor connector connection of antenna or antenna feeder.
roads).
• Other audio sounds are normal.
• Any radio cannot be received or poor
• Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
Radio is not received or poor reception is caused even after moving
• Poor connector connection of antenna or antenna feed-
reception. to a service area with good reception
er.
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob-
stacles generating external noises).

RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

Symptom Probable malfunction location


None of the steering switch operations work. Steering switch malfunction. Replace steering wheel.
Only specified switch cannot be operated. Refer to ST-30, "Removal and Installation".

Steering switches “ ”, “MENU UP”, “MENU DOWN”,“ ” Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
and, “OK” do not work. Refer to AV-170, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Steering switches “VOL UP”, “VOL DOWN”and “ ”, do not Steering switch signal B circuit malfunction.
work. Refer to AV-170, "Diagnosis Procedure".

RELATED TO USB INTERFACE


NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of USB interface main body before performing a diagnosis.

Symptom Probable malfunction location


No voice sound is heard when AUX mode is selected. AUX sound signal circuit between USB interface and AV control unit.
• USB harness malfunction.
iPod® or USB memory cannot be recognized. • USB interface malfunction.

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Revision: October 2015 AV-176 2016 Maxima NAM


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
Description INFOID:0000000012193776

NOTE: B
For navigation system operation information, refer to Navigation System Owner's Manual.
BASIC OPERATIONS
C
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
The system is in the video mode. Press “AUDIO” to change the mode. D
No image is displayed.
The interior of the vehicle becomes a little more than
Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
80°C (176°F), the protection of the display reacts,
cooled down.
and a display is turned OFF. E
Screen not clear. Contrast setting is not appropriate. Adjust the contrast of the display.
The volume is not set correctly, or it is turned OFF. Adjust the volume of voice guidance.
No voice guidance is available. Or F
the volume is too high or too low. Voice guidance is not provided for certain streets
This is not a malfunction.
(roads displayed in gray).
No map is displayed on the screen. A screen other than map screen is displayed. Press “MAP” switch.
G
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low.
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
This is not a malfunction. H
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the navigation system.
I
NOTE:
Locations stored in the Address Book and other memory functions may be lost if the vehicle's battery is dis-
connected or becomes discharged. If this occurs, service the vehicle's battery as necessary and re-enter the
information in the Address Book. J

RELATED TO VOICE RECOGNITION


Related to Basic Operation K

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution


The interior of the vehicle is too noisy. Close the windows or have other occupants quiet. L
The volume of your voice is too low. Speak louder.
The volume of your voice is too loud. Speak softer.
M
Your pronunciation is unclear. Speak clearly.
The system does not
recognize your com- Press and release “ ” switch on the steering
You are speaking before the voice recognition is ready. switch, and speak a command after the tone
mand. AV
or sounds.
the system recognizes Make sure to speak a command within 8 seconds
your command incor- 8 seconds or more have passed after you pressed and
after you press and release “ ” switch on the O
rectly released “ ” switch on the steering switch.
steering switch.
Only a limited range of voice commands is usable for Use a correct voice command appropriate for the
each screen. current screen.
P
Lower the fan speed as necessary as voice com-
The fan of the air conditioner is too loud.
mand can be recognized more easily.

Related to Item Choice


The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, fol-
low the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem
is resolved.

Revision: October 2015 AV-177 2016 Maxima NAM


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

Symptom/ Error message Solution


1. Ensure that the command format is valid.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise
level.
Displays “COMMAND NOT REC-
OGNIZED” or the system fails to in- 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
terpret the command correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then command should be tried with these
in place.
1. Ensure that the voice tag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed
The system consistently selects by giving the “Address Book” Directory or Phone Directory command.
the wrong voice tag.
2. Replace one of the voice tags being confused with a different voice tag.

Related to Telephone
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try
the following solutions:
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is
resolved.

Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise
level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster
System fails to interpret the com- on).
mand correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be
carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA)
mode”, refer to “OWNER’S MANUAL”.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This
The system consistently selects can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command.
the wrong voice tag
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

RELATED TO AUDIO
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interfer-
ence, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction.
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment are malfunction-
ing. Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and
operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
NOTE:
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because it can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A) or could
be incorrectly mastered by the customer on a computer.
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the “red book” Compact
Disc Standard and may not play.

Revision: October 2015 AV-178 2016 Maxima NAM


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

Symptom Cause and countermeasure A


Check if the CD was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone
B
(about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal
temperature. C
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A files on a CD, only
the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Cannot play Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “AAC”, “.M4A”, “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.aac” or “.m4a” D
cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and
file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the E
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A writing applications or other text editing applica-
tions.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. F
Check if the CD is protected by copyright.
Disks recorded in live file system format are not supported.
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty. G
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A CD or if it is a multi-session disc,
the music starts playing. some time may be required before the music starts playing.
H
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips
depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data.
I
When a non-MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “AAC”,
Move immediately to the next song
“.M4A”“.mp3”, “.wma”, “.aac” or “.m4a” or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the play-
when playing
er will skip to the next song.
The songs do not play in the de- The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might J
sired order. not play in the desired order.
Poor reception only from a certain
Check incoming radio wave signal strength of applicable broadcast station.
radio broadcast station. K
The majority of rattle sounds are not indicative of an issue with the speaker; usually something
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker
nearby the speaker is causing the rattle.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other L
sources is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking M
the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.
AV
RELATED TO VEHICLE ICON

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution O


This is because the quantity of the displayed in-
formation is reduced so that the screen does
Names of roads differ between Plan not become too crowded. There is also a P
chance that names of the roads may be dis- This is not a malfunction.
View and Birdview™. played multiple times, and the names appear-
ing on the screen may be different because of
a processing procedure.

Revision: October 2015 AV-179 2016 Maxima NAM


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
The vehicle was transported after the ignition
Drive the vehicle for a while on a road where
switch was pressed off (for example, by a ferry
GPS signals can be received.
or car transporter).
The vehicle icon is not displayed in
the correct position. The position and direction of the vehicle icon
This is not a malfunction. Drive the vehicle for
may be incorrect depending on the driving en-
a while to automatically correct the position
vironments and the levels of positioning accu-
and direction of the vehicle icon.
racy of the navigation system.
When the vehicle is traveling on a Because the new road is not stored in the map
Updated road information will be included in
new road, the vehicle icon is located data, the system automatically places the vehi-
the next version of the map data.
on another road nearby. cle icon on the nearest road available.
The screen does not switch to the
The daytime screen was set the last time the Set the screen to the night screen mode using
night screen even after turning on
headlights were turned on. "Day/Night" when you turn on the headlights.
the headlights.
The map does not scroll even when The current location map screen is not dis-
Press “MAP”.
the vehicle is moving. played.
The current location map screen is not dis-
The vehicle icon is not displayed. Press “MAP”.
played.
Drive the vehicle for a while [at approximately
30 km/h (19 MPH) for about 30 minutes] to
When using tire chains or replacing the tires,
automatically correct the vehicle icon posi-
speed calculations based on the speed sensor
tion.
The location of the vehicle icon is may be incorrect.
If this does not correct the vehicle icon posi-
misaligned from the actual position. tion, contact an Nissan dealer.
The map data has a mistake or is incomplete
Updated road information will be included in
(the vehicle icon position is always misaligned
the next version of the map data.
in the same area).

RELATED TO ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution


Waypoints are not included in Waypoints that you have already passed are not included in If you want to go to that waypoint
the auto reroute calculation. the auto reroute calculation. again, you need to edit the route.
Set the destination and perform route
Route calculation has not yet been performed.
calculation.

Route information is not dis- You are not driving on the suggested route. Drive on the suggested route.
played. Route guidance is set to OFF. Turn on route guidance.
Route information is not provided for certain types of roads
This is not a malfunction.
(roads displayed in gray).
The auto reroute calculation (or
detour calculation) suggests Route calculations took priority conditions into consider-
This is not a malfunction.
the same route as the one pre- ation, but the same route was calculated.
viously suggested.
A maximum of 5 waypoints can be set
Five waypoints are already set on the route, including ones on the route. If you want to go to 6 or
A waypoint cannot be added.
that you have already passed. more waypoints, perform route calcu-
lations multiple times as necessary.
Reset the destination to a main or or-
Roads near the destination cannot be calculated.
dinary road, and recalculate the route.
The starting point and destination are too close. Set a more distant destination.
The suggested route is not dis- Divide your trip by selecting one or two
played. The starting point and destination are too far away. intermediate destinations, and per-
form route calculations multiple times.
There are time restricted roads (by the day of the week, by Set "Use Time Restricted Roads" to
time) near the current vehicle location or destination. OFF.

Revision: October 2015 AV-180 2016 Maxima NAM


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
A
A route is managed by sections between waypoints. If you
The part of the route that you passed the first waypoint, the section between the starting
This is not a malfunction.
have already passed is deleted. point and the waypoint is deleted. (It may not be deleted de-
pending on the area.) B
If there are restrictions (such as one-way streets) on roads
Adjust the location of the starting point
close to the starting point or destination, the system may
or destination.
suggest an indirect route.
An indirect route is suggested. C
The system may suggest an indirect route because route
Reset the destination to a main or or-
calculation does not take into consideration some areas
dinary road, and recalculate the route.
such as narrow streets (gray roads).
D
The landmark information does
Updated information will be included
not correspond to the actual in- This may be caused by insufficient or incorrect map data.
in the next version of the data.
formation.
The suggested route does not E
Set the starting point, waypoints and
exactly connect to the starting There is no data for route calculation close to these loca-
destination on a main road, and per-
point, waypoints, or destina- tions.
form route calculation.
tion.
F
RELATED TO VOICE GUIDANCE

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution G


Voice guidance is only available at certain intersections
marked. In some cases, voice guidance is not available This is not a malfunction.
even when the vehicle should make a turn. H
Voice guidance is not available. Go back to the suggested route or request
The vehicle has deviated from the suggested route.
route calculation again.
Voice guidance is set to OFF. Turn ON voice guidance. I
Route guidance is set to OFF. Turn ON route guidance.
The guidance contact does not
The contact of voice guidance may vary, depending on
correspond to the actual condi- Follow all traffic rules and regulations. J
the types of intersections at which turns are made.
tion.

RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE


K
Symptom Cause and countermeasure
®
Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized
Does not recognize cellular phone connection. (No connection is L
by the in-vehicle phone module. Refer to “RELATED TO HANDS-
displayed on the display at the guide). FREE PHONE (Check Compatibility)” of MULTI AV SYSTEM
SYMPTOM.
Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the fol- M
lowing conditions:
• The vehicle is outside the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
waves, such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, AV
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
Cannot use hands-free phone. • The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE:
O
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wire-
less connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones. P
When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
The other party's voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone. loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person's voice during a
call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or
Poor sound quality. far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.

Revision: October 2015 AV-181 2016 Maxima NAM


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
RELATED TO NISSANCONNECTSM

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution


Sign up for a subscription to the NISSAN-
CONNECTSM service. For details about
A subscription for the NISSANCONNECTSM service subscriptions, contact a NISSAN dealer or
has not been established.
visit the NISSANCONNECTSM center
website.
The communication line is busy. Try again after a short period of time.
When the vehicle moves to an area where
The system cannot connect to radio waves can be transmitted sufficiently,
the NISSANCONNECTSM The vehicle is in a location where it is difficult to receive communication will be restored. When the
center. radio waves. icon on the display shows that the vehicle
is inside the communication area, the sys-
tem can be used.
When the vehicle moves to an area where
radio waves can be transmitted sufficiently,
communication will be restored. When the
Radio wave reception for TCU is insufficient.
icon on the display shows that the vehicle
is inside the communication area, the sys-
tem can be used.
Some of the items that are dis- The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehi-
The vehicle is being driven and some menu items are
played on the menu screen cle in a safe location and apply the parking
disabled.
cannot be selected. brake before operating the functions.
Operate the system after stopping the ve-
Some parts of the screen are The vehicle is being driven and some menu items are
hicle in a safe location and applying the
not displayed disabled.
parking brake.
Adjust the volume level by operating the
The system does not announce VOL switches located on the control panel
The volume level is set to the minimum.
information. or on the steering wheel switch while the
system is announcing information.

Revision: October 2015 AV-182 2016 Maxima NAM


AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A


AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000012193777
B

AWNIA4086ZZ J

1. A/C switch assembly 2. AV control unit 3. Audio unit finisher (LH)


4. Audio unit bracket (LH) 5. A/C auto amp. 6. Audio unit bracket (RH)
K
7. Audio unit finisher (RH)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193778


L
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before disconnecting the AV control unit and battery terminals, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait M
at least 30 seconds.
NOTE:
• Before replacing AV control unit, perform “Before Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” to save or AV
print current vehicle specification. Refer to AV-94, "Description".
• After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds.
Data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
O
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-105, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove A/C switch assembly. Refer to HAC-100, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove AV control unit screws then pull out AV control unit.
P
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from AV control unit and remove.
5. Remove AV control unit bracket (LH/RH) screws and AV control unit brackets [(LH/RH) (if necessary)].
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “After Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” or “Manual Configuration”
when replacing AV control unit. Refer to AV-94, "Description".
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2015 AV-183 2016 Maxima NAM
STEERING SWITCHES
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
STEERING SWITCHES
Exploded View INFOID:0000000012217603

AWGIA0369ZZ

1. Driver air bag module 2. Steering wheel 3. Cover


4. Steering column cover 5. Steering wheel switches

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012217604

REMOVAL
NOTE:
The steering switches are serviced as an assembly.
1. Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws (A) and pawls then remove steering wheel rear
finisher (1) from steering wheel (2).

: Pawl

ALNIA1731ZZ

Revision: October 2015 AV-184 2016 Maxima NAM


STEERING SWITCHES
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
3. Remove screws (A) and pawls then remove steering wheel front
finisher (2) from steering wheel (1). A

: Pawl
B

AWNIA4073ZZ

D
4. Remove screws (A) and remove steering switches from steering
wheel (1).
E

G
ALNIA1733ZZ

INSTALLATION
H
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-185 2016 Maxima NAM


USB INTERFACE AND AUX IN JACK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
USB INTERFACE AND AUX IN JACK
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012227397

REMOVAL
1. Remove shift selector finisher. Refer to IP-20, "Exploded View".
2. Release pawls and remove USB interface and AUX in jack (2)
from the back of the shift selector finisher (1).

: Pawl

ALNIA1729ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: October 2015 AV-186 2016 Maxima NAM


INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012226876

INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER (LH) B


REMOVAL
1. Remove defroster grille. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
C
2. Disconnect the harness connector from instrument panel
tweeter (LH) and remove screws (A) to remove instrument panel
tweeter [LH (1)].
D
(2) : Instrument panel assembly
: Front
E

F
AWNIA4124ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G
INSTRUMENT PANEL TWEETER (RH)
REMOVAL H
1. Remove instrument panel tweeter grill. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from instrument panel tweeter (RH) and remove screws to remove
instrument panel tweeter. I
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
J

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-187 2016 Maxima NAM


CENTER SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
CENTER SPEAKER
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193785

REMOVAL
1. Remove defroster grille. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from center speaker (1) and
remove screws (A) to remove.

(2) : Instrument panel assembly


: Front

ALNIA1736ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: October 2015 AV-188 2016 Maxima NAM


FRONT TWEETER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
FRONT TWEETER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000012232191

ALNIA1742ZZ

1. Door mirror corner finisher 2. Front tweeter A. Screw G

NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar. H
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193786

REMOVAL I
1. Remove door mirror corner finisher. Refer to MIR-21, "Exploded View".
2. Remove screws (A) and remove front tweeter (1) from door mir-
ror corner finisher (2). J

ALNIA1737ZZ
M
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-189 2016 Maxima NAM


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000012232337

ALNIA1743ZZ

1. Front door finisher 2. Front door speaker

NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012226877

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-27, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws (A) and pull out front door speaker (1).
NOTE:
LH shown, RH similar.

ALNIA1727ZZ

3. Disconnect the harness connector from front door speaker and remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: October 2015 AV-190 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012226878

REMOVAL B
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-29, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws (A) then remove rear door speaker (1).
NOTE: C
RH shown, LH similar.

ALNIA1684ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-191 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR SPEAKER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
REAR SPEAKER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000012232338

AWNIA4098ZZ

1. Rear speaker 2. Rear parcel shelf Front

NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar.
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012226879

REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-40, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the rear speaker screws.
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear speaker and remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: October 2015 AV-192 2016 Maxima NAM


SUBWOOFER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
SUBWOOFER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000012193789

AWNIA4098ZZ

1. Rear subwoofer 2. Rear parcel shelf Front G

NOTE:
RH shown, LH similar. H
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193790

REMOVAL I
1. Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-40, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the rear subwoofer screws. J
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear subwoofer and remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-193 2016 Maxima NAM


BOSE SPEAKER AMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Exploded View INFOID:0000000012193791

ALNIA1738ZZ

1. Rear parcel shelf 2. BOSE speaker amp. bracket 3. BOSE speaker amp.
Front

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193792

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-40, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-194 2016 Maxima NAM


BOSE SPEAKER AMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
2. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the BOSE speaker
amp. (1). A
3. Remove bolts (A) then remove BOSE speaker amp.

ALNIA1745ZZ

D
4. Remove BOSE speaker amp. bracket (if necessary).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. E

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-195 2016 Maxima NAM


SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012242627

REMOVAL
1. Lower headlining (rear). Refer to INT-47, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect harness connector (B) from antenna feeder.
3. Remove nut (A) from satellite antenna (1) and remove.

: Front

ALNIA1734ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Satellite radio antenna nut : 6.5 N·m (0.66 kg-m, 58 in-lb)


CAUTION:
If the satellite antenna nut is not tightened to the specified torque, lower sensitivity of the antenna may
be experienced. If the nut is tightened tighter than the specified torque, this will deform the roof panel.
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000012242628

DISASSEMBLY
Insert a suitable tool into gap between satellite antenna (2) and the
cover (1) then remove the cover (1) from satellite antenna (2).

ALNIA1735ZZ

ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

Revision: October 2015 AV-196 2016 Maxima NAM


ANTENNA AMP.
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
ANTENNA AMP.
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193796

REMOVAL B
1. Remove rear pillar finisher (RH). Refer to INT-37, "REAR PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors (A) from the antenna amp.
(1). C
3. Remove bolt (B) and remove.

: Front
D

ALNIA1747ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-197 2016 Maxima NAM


GPS ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
GPS ANTENNA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193797

REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screw to remove GPS antenna from instrument panel.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: October 2015 AV-198 2016 Maxima NAM


MICROPHONE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
MICROPHONE
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193798

REMOVAL B
1. Remove front room\map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-50, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from front room\map lamp
assembly (2). C
3. Release pawls and remove microphone (1).

: Pawl
D

ALNIA1691ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
G

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-199 2016 Maxima NAM


ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL MICROPHONE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL MICROPHONE
Removal and Installation - Front INFOID:0000000012441112

REMOVAL
1. Remove the headlining. Refer to INT-48, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors (A) from the active noise
control microphones (1,2).

: Pawl
: Front

3. Release the pawls, then remove the active noise control micro-
phones (1,2) from the headlining.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle the pawls that retain the microphone to
avoid damaging.

ALNIA1776ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Check the microphone for looseness after installation.
Removal and Installation - Rear INFOID:0000000012441113

REMOVAL
1. Remove the headlining. Refer to INT-48, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the active noise con-
trol microphone (1).

: Pawl
: Front

3. Release the pawls, then remove the active noise control micro-
phone (1) from the headlining.
CAUTION:
Carefully handle the pawls that retain the microphone to
avoid damaging. ALNIA1777ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Check the microphone for looseness after installation.

Revision: October 2015 AV-200 2016 Maxima NAM


TCU
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
TCU
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012441118

REMOVAL B
NOTE:
Before replacing TCU, perform "SAVE VIN DATA" to save current vehicle specification. For details, refer to AV-
91, "Description". C
1. Remove AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors (A) from TCU (1).
D

ALNIA1779ZZ

G
3. Remove screws, then remove TCU with the bracket attached.
4. Remove the bracket from TCU, if necessary.
INSTALLATION H
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
2. After installation, perform activation. Refer to AV-91, "Description".
I

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-201 2016 Maxima NAM


TEL ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
TEL ANTENNA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012441119

REMOVAL
1. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screw to remove TEL antenna from instrument panel.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: October 2015 AV-202 2016 Maxima NAM


TELEMATICS SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
TELEMATICS SWITCH
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012441108

B
The telematics switch is serviced as part of the room/map lamp. Refer to INL-50, "Removal and Installation".

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-203 2016 Maxima NAM


MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MULTI AV SYSTEM]
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012504125

REMOVAL
1. Remove shift selector finisher. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View"
2. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the multifunction
switch (1).
3. Remove screws (A) and remove multifunction switch (1) from
the shift selector finisher (2).

ALNIA1780ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: October 2015 AV-204 2016 Maxima NAM


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000012300414

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
F
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni- H
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the I
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV Control Unit INFOID:0000000012193800
J
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal, and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more after turning the igni-
tion switch OFF. K
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the display control unit, and the AV control unit continues operating for
approximately 30 seconds.
L
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000012193801

M
M-CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. AV
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000012193802 O

AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
P

Revision: October 2015 AV-205 2016 Maxima NAM


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

PKIA0306E

• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000012193803

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
- Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: October 2015 AV-206 2016 Maxima NAM


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000012193804
B
The actual shape of the tools may differ from those illustrated here.
Tool number Description
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
— Removing trim components
(J-46534) D
Trim Tool Set

AWJIA0483ZZ

F
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000012193805

G
Tool name Description
Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts
H

PIIB1407E

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-207 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000012193806

AWNIA4093ZZ

No. Component Function


1. Rear view camera Refer to AV-209, "Rear Camera".
2. Door mirror RH Refer to AV-209, "Side Camera".
3. Front camera Refer to AV-209, "Front Camera".
4. Around view monitor control unit Refer to AV-208, "Around View Monitor Control Unit".
5. AV control unit Refer to AV-13, "AV Control Unit".
6. Combination meter Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter".
7. Door mirror LH Refer to AV-209, "Side Camera".
8. Steering angle sensor Refer to AV-210, "Steering Angle Sensor".

Around View Monitor Control Unit INFOID:0000000012193807

• The around view monitor control unit is installed at the lower dash.
• Necessary signals are transmitted/received to/from control unit via
CAN communication.
• Camera image signals received from each camera are converted/
synthesized in the around view monitor control unit and transmitted
to the AV control unit.
• Vehicle width guide lines, predicted course line, vehicle front guid-
ing line and vehicle side line, tire icon, and vehicle icon are ren-
dered with the around view monitor control unit and combined with
camera image.
AWNIA4090ZZ

Revision: October 2015 AV-208 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
Front Camera INFOID:0000000012193808

A
• The front camera is installed in the front grille.
• Super-small CMOS camera (color) using CMOS* for the image
pickup element is adopted. B
• Power for the camera is supplied from the around view monitor
control unit, and the image at the front of the vehicle is sent to the
around view monitor control unit.
NOTE: C
*: “CMOS” is an abbreviation of Complementary Metal Oxide Semi-
conductor and features low power consumption and high speed
reading rate of electric charge. D
JSNIA6179ZZ

Specification
E
Image pickup element 1/3.8-inch CMOS image sensor
Effective number of pixels Approx. 300,000 pixels (632 × 480)
F
Minimum brightness 1 lx
Angle of view H: 190° V: 141°
G
Side Camera INFOID:0000000012193809

• The side camera is installed in the door mirror.


• Super-small CMOS camera (color) using CMOS* for the image H
pickup element is adopted.
• Power for the camera is supplied from the around view monitor
control unit, and the image at the side of the vehicle is sent to the I
around view monitor control unit.
NOTE:
*: “CMOS” is an abbreviation of Complementary Metal Oxide Semi-
J
conductor and features low power consumption and high speed
reading rate of electric charge.
JSNIA5851ZZ
K
Specification

Image pickup element 1/3.8-inch CMOS image sensor


L
Effective number of pixels Approx. 300,000 pixels (632 × 480)
Minimum brightness 1 lx
Angle of view H: 190° V: 141° M

Rear Camera INFOID:0000000012193810

AV
• The rear camera is installed next to the license plate lamp.
• Super-small CMOS camera (color) using CMOS* for the image
pickup element is adopted. O
• With the mirror processing function, a mirror image is sent as if it is
viewed by a rear view mirror.
• Power for the camera is supplied from the around view monitor
control unit, and the image at the rear of the vehicle is sent to the P
around view monitor control unit.
NOTE:
*: “CMOS” is an abbreviation of Complementary Metal Oxide Semi-
conductor and features low power consumption and high speed JSNIA6012ZZ
reading rate of electric charge.
Specification

Revision: October 2015 AV-209 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

Image pickup element 1/3.8-inch CMOS image sensor


Effective number of pixels Approx. 300,000 pixels (632 × 480)
Minimum brightness 1 lx
Angle of view H: 190° V: 141°
Image With the mirror processing function

Steering Angle Sensor INFOID:0000000012193811

• Steering angle sensor is installed to the spiral cable.


• Steering angle sensor sends the steering signal necessary for pre-
dictive course line of the front or rear view monitor to the around
view monitor control unit via CAN communication.

JSNIA1571ZZ

Revision: October 2015 AV-210 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
A
System Description INFOID:0000000012193812

SYSTEM DIAGRAM B

I
AWNIA3879ZZ

Around View Monitor Control Unit Input Signal (CAN Communication) J

Transmit unit Signal name


Steering angle sensor Steering angle sensor signal K
Shift position signal
TCM
Vehicle speed signal
Door switch signal
L
BCM
Trunk switch signal
AV control unit Camera switch signal M
Around View Monitor Control Unit Output Signal (CAN Communication)

Transmit unit Signal name AV


AV control unit View change signal

DESCRIPTION O
• This system is equipped with wide-angle, high-resolution cameras on the front and rear of the vehicle and on
both the right and left door mirrors. The images from front view, rear view, front-side view RH side, and birds-
eye view which shows the view from the top of the vehicle, are displayed to monitor the vehicle surround-
ings. P
• Around view monitor control unit cuts out and expands the image received from each camera to create each
view.
• Camera image is displayed on the display.
• In front view and rear view, the vehicle width, distance lines and predictive course lines are superimposed
and displayed. In front-side view, the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line are dis-
played.

Revision: October 2015 AV-211 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
• The Bird’s-Eye view converts the images from four cameras into the overhead view and displays the status
of the vehicle on display. The vehicle icon and sonar indicator that are displayed on the Bird’s-Eye view dis-
play are rendered by around view monitor control unit.
• Moving Object Detection (MOD) is adopted and detects moving objects according to camera image and noti-
fies the detection result to the driver.
• Tire icon is adopted for Birds-Eye view image.
• Front/rear wide view function is adopted. Visibility for the left and right views that contains invisible area is
improved.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SCREEN
• Around view monitor combines and displays the travel direction view and Birds-Eye view, Front-side view,
and then it displays the sonar indicator on the Bird’s-Eye view, Front-side view, Rear wide view.
• AV control unit renders the “Change View” switch, view icon, and warning message on display.
Screen constitution

AWNIA3830GB

OPERATION DESCRIPTION

Revision: October 2015 AV-212 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
Around view monitor screen transition
A

JSNIA4607GB
K
• Around view monitor is displayed on the display when “CAMERA” switch is pressed, when shifting position is
reverse.
• Bird’s-Eye view, Front-side view, and front/rear wide view can be switched by “Change View” switch (touch L
switch) or “CAMERA” switch while around view monitor is displayed.
• Priority of view to be displayed can be set by “Settings” screen.
• While shift position is other than reverse, around view monitor is canceled when approximately 3 minutes
M
are passed after “CAMERA” switch is pressed or when vehicle speed is approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH) or
more. The screen returns to the screen before displaying around view monitor.
• Setting of Moving Object Detection (MOD) can be switched ON/OFF by temporary OFF switch of AV control
unit (Temporary OFF). AV
• In temporary OFF, around view monitor is canceled. Temporary OFF is canceled when around view monitor
is displayed once again. MOD is switched to operation-ready status.
• In permanent OFF, MOD is not operative until MOD is switched to ON by “Settings” screen. O
• In Bird’s-Eye view, an enhanced boundary is displayed on the image indicating the invisible area and clearly
indicating the boundary of the four cameras. The invisible area is displayed in yellow when Bird’s-Eye view is
displayed after the ignition switch is turned ON.
• If information of camera and information written to around view monitor control unit are not the same, error P
indicator of applicable camera position is displayed when Bird’s-Eye view is displayed.
• When “CAMERA” switch is pressed, it receives camera switch signal from AV control unit via CAN communi-
cation.
• When around view monitor control unit receives camera switch signal around view monitor control unit reads
the image signal from each camera.
• When around view monitor control unit receives reverse signal, while shift position is R position, around view
monitor control unit reads image signal from each camera.

Revision: October 2015 AV-213 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
• When around view monitor control unit reads image signal from each camera, it cuts out the required screen
for each view, superimposes camera image, vehicle icon, guiding lines, predicted course line, and “MOD”
icon and then outputs them to AV control unit.
Front View
• The front view image is from the front camera.
• When the selector lever is in any position other than the reverse position, the front view is displayed by
pressing the “CAMERA” switch. It improves the visibility of obstacles in front of the vehicle and helps driving
by the images displayed from Bird’s-Eye view and Front-side view. The front wide view function allows the
display of an image with a 180° horizontal angle.
• Displays the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line in front view and displays the predic-
tive course line according to the steering angle.
• If the steering angle is within approximately 90 degrees, the predictive course lines on the left/right side are
displayed. If the steering angle is exceeding approximately 90 degrees, only the predictive course line on the
outside (in the opposite side of steering direction) is displayed.
• Around view monitor control unit is connected to the steering angle sensor and receives the steering angle
signal via CAN communication.
• Around view monitor control unit controls the direction and distance of the predictive course line according to
the sensor signal from steering angle sensor.
Front view guiding lines

JSNIA0770GB

Rear View
• The rear view image is from the rear camera.
• When the selector lever is in the reverse position, the rear view is displayed. Backing and parking are
improved by the images from Bird’s-Eye view and Front-side view. The rear wide view function allows the
display of an image with a 180° horizontal angle.
• Displays the vehicle width guiding line and vehicle distance guiding line in rear view and displays the predic-
tive course line according to the steering angle (except when using the rear wide view function).
• The predictive course line is not displayed at the steering neutral position.
• Around view monitor control unit is connected to the steering angle sensor and receives the steering angle
signal via CAN communication.
• Around view monitor control unit controls the direction and distance of predictive course line according to the
sensor signal from steering angle sensor.

Revision: October 2015 AV-214 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
Rear view guiding lines
A

H
AWNIA4092GB

Front-side View
• The Front-side view image is from the side camera RH. I
• In Front-side view, displays the vehicle distance guiding line and vehicle width guiding line.
Front-side view area and guiding line
J

AV

JSNIA0771GB
O
Birds-eye View
• The image from the four cameras is cut out and converted into the overhead view, and the surroundings of
the vehicle are displayed in birds-eye view. P
• In Birds-Eye view, the invisible area is displayed on the image to specify the boundaries of the four cameras.
• The invisible area is displayed in yellow in the Bird’s-Eye view after turning the ignition switch ON as an
information for the user. (OFF setting can be performed)

Revision: October 2015 AV-215 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
Birds-Eye view display image

AWNIA4091GB

Birds-Eye view display area

JSNIA5161GB

Moving Object Detection (MOD)


• Moving Object Detection (MOD) is a function that notifies the driver of the presence of moving objects in the
area around the vehicle. MOD detects moving objects from camera image, illuminates frame of view in yel-
low whenever “MOD” icon is displayed in blue, and sounds chime.
• MOD detects moving objects while camera image is displayed on AV control unit.
• Around view monitor control unit performs the following process when moving objects are detected:
- Superimposes yellow frame line on camera image signal and outputs it to AV control unit.
Revision: October 2015 AV-216 2016 Maxima NAM
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
- Transmits MOD chime sound output request signal to the AV control unit via CAN communication.
- The combination meter receives the MOD beep sound output request signal from around view monitor con- A
trol unit and outputs chime.
• Around view monitor control unit detects moving objects from camera image according to an image recogni-
tion method called optical flow.
B
• MOD does not detect a background as a moving object when the vehicle moves (when whole screen
moves) but detects a moving object when an actual moving object is displayed on screen.
• MOD can be set to temporary OFF or permanent OFF by the following operations:
- Temporary off: MOD is switched to OFF with a switch on the AV control unit (touch switch) while camera C
image is displayed on AV control unit.
- Permanent off: MOD is switched to OFF by “Settings”.
• Color of “MOD” icon indicates whether or not MOD is operative. “MOD” icon is displayed as shown in the fol- D
lowing table. when MOD is operative, “MOD” icon is displayed in blue. when MOD is not operative, “MOD”
icon is displayed in gray. MOD icon is not displayed when MOD is off (permanent OFF) by “Settings”, or
when MOD is OFF (temporary OFF) by switch of AV control unit (touch switch):
E
Shift position
View P or N position D position R position
F
“MOD” icon display
Birds-Eye view Blue Gray
Birds-Eye view and rear view —
Rear view Gray Blue G
Birds-Eye view Blue Gray
Birds-Eye view and front view —
Front view Gray Blue
H
Side view × ×
Side view and rear view —
Rear view Gray Blue
Side view × × I
Side view and front view —
Front view Gray Blue
Rear wide view Gray — Blue
J
Front wide view Gray Blue —
×: Icon is not displayed.
—: View is not displayed in each shift position (D position and R position).
K
• MOD illuminates frame of view in yellow and sounds chime when any of the conditions in the following table
are satisfied:

L
Operation Condition
View where MOD is operative
Shift position Vehicle speed
P or N position 0 km/h Birds-Eye view M
0 km/h (0 MPH) or more - less than 8 km/h (5 • Front view
D position
MPH) • Front wide view
0 km/h (0 MPH) or more - less than 8 km/h (5 • Rear view AV
R position
MPH) • Rear wide view
• MOD does not operate or stops operation when any of the conditions in the following table are satisfied:
O
Operation stop condition Note
• MOD does not stop operation for front view and front wide view.
Door open • Operation stops for rear view and rear wide view while trunk is open. P
• Operation stops for Bird’s-Eye view when any door is open.
Expanding/retracting status of door mirror is judged according to operation signal of door
Door mirror expanding/retracting
mirror motor transmitted from door mirror (driver side) to around view monitor control unit.

Tire Icon
• Tire icon is adopted for Bird’s-Eye view screen.
• Tire icon is a function that notifies the steered direction of front tire to the driver and assists the driving.

Revision: October 2015 AV-217 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
• In tire icon, around view monitor control unit superimposes steering angle information to camera image and
outputs camera image signal to AV control unit.
• Around view monitor control unit judges steering angle according to steering signal received from steering
angle sensor via CAN communication.
CAMERA IMAGE OPERATION PRINCIPLE
• If the information written to around view monitor control unit and the information from the camera do not
match, the applicable camera position is indicated as an error on the Birds-Eye view display. (Calibration
operation is necessary when replacing each camera or when replacing around view monitor control unit.)
• Around view monitor control unit receives the camera switch signal from AV control unit via CAN communi-
cation by pressing the “CAMERA” button.
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera button signal supplies the power to each camera
and inputs the camera image from each camera.
• When the selector lever is in the reverse position, around view monitor control unit receives the reverse sig-
nal, supplies the power to each camera, and inputs the camera image from each camera.
• Around view monitor control unit that receives the camera image signal from each camera cuts out the
required screen for each view, superimposes the camera image, vehicle icon, guiding lines, sonar indicator
and “MOD” icon and outputs them to the display unit.
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000012193813

DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
U0428: ST ANGLE SENSOR • Front tire angle display is stopped.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
CALIBRATION • Using “SETTING” menu display, switch
sensor is not complete.
each indicator of predicted course line dis-
play and MOD switch to “OFF” (turn OFF)
so that switch operation cannot be per-
formed.
The following functions are stopped:
• When communication of steering angle
sensor signal is not normal:
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- Front tire angle display is stopped.
- Using “SETTING” menu display, switch
each indicator of predicted course line dis-
play and MOD switch to “OFF” (turn OFF)
When around view monitor control unit cannot
so that switch operation cannot be per-
U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT transmit/receive CAN communication signal
formed.
continuously for 2 seconds or more.
• When communication of vehicle signal,
and shift signal is not normal:
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- Using “SETTING” menu display, switch
each indicator of predicted course line dis-
play and MOD switch to “OFF” (turn OFF)
so that switch operation cannot be per-
formed.

Revision: October 2015 AV-218 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT A
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
U111A: REAR CAMERA IMAGE switch is ON. B
SIGNAL NOTE:
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
No-signal status of side camera RH image sig-
C
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111B: SIDE CAMERA RH IM- tion switch is ON.
AGE SIGNAL NOTE: D
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved. Camera image is not displayed (gray screen
No-signal status of front camera image signal is display).
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition E
U111C: FRONT CAMERA IMAGE switch is ON.
SIGNAL NOTE:
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
F
saved.
No-signal status of side camera LH image sig-
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111D: SIDE CAMERA LH IM- tion switch is ON. G
AGE SIGNAL NOTE:
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
H
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle • Tire icon is stopped. I
U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB sensor is performed. NG signal from steering • Using “SETTING” menu display, switch
angle sensor is received. each indicator of predicted course line dis-
play and MOD switch to “OFF” (turn OFF)
so that switch operation cannot be per- J
formed.
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more K
when ignition switch is turned ON:
U1302: CAMERA POWER VOLT • When supplemental lighting power supply Camera power output is stopped.
output is ON: 5.9 – 6.5 V.
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply L
measurement.
• When camera calibration is incomplete.
• When camera information in around view M
monitor control unit and information read
U1304: CAMERA IMAGE CALIB from camera are not the same. Unmatched icon display (red) is displayed
NOTE: (applicable for unmatched camera only).
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not AV
saved.
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con-
trol unit is incomplete. O
Operation is according to the vehicle setting
U1305: CONFIG UNFINISH NOTE:
value as default value.
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
P

Revision: October 2015 AV-219 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
When around view monitor control unit is not
Switch to camera screen is not allowed.
normal.
When communication between around view
monitor control unit and each camera is not nor- On applicable camera screen, marking
Other (red) is displayed.
mal.
When communication line between around
view monitor control unit and each camera im- On applicable camera image screen, dis-
age line is affected by electromagnetic noises. play (blue) is displayed.

Revision: October 2015 AV-220 2016 Maxima NAM


HANDLING PRECAUTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
HANDLING PRECAUTION
A
Display INFOID:0000000012193814

• When the compartment temperature is low, the display images may look slower because the LCD response B
is deteriorated. The system will recover its normal operation when the cabin temperature increases to an
appropriate level.
• When the compartment temperature is low [0°C (32°F) or less], the display images may look slower. It is
characteristic of the LCD monitor and should not be considered to be a malfunction. When the temperature C
is at the operating temperature [0°C (32°F) to 50°C (122°F)], the display returns to normal.
• There may be small dark or bright dots in the screen or remaining display content may be found (image lag).
These are inherent symptoms to any LCD monitor and should not be considered to be a malfunction. D
• The image may look bright or dark when viewed obliquely from the rear. It is inherent to any LCD monitor
and should not be considered to be a malfunction.
• Do not apply pressure on the LCD monitor. Doing so may cause irregularities in the screen image or render
it inoperative. E
• Do not use hard cloth, organic solvent (alcohol, benzine, and thinner), or chemical wipe to clean the LCD
monitor. Doing so may affect the panel surface. When cleaning the LCD monitor, always wipe it with a soft
cloth after shutting off the power. For severe contamination, use a soft cloth dampened with mild detergent F
(no droplets can be present).
Around View Monitor INFOID:0000000012193815

G
PRECAUTIONS FOR THE HANDLING OF CAMERA SYSTEM
• The camera system assists the detection of obstacles. When operating the vehicle, the safety must be con-
firmed and ensured directly by sight, using the mirrors. H
• Distance shown by vehicle width guiding lines and predicted course lines may differ from actual distance
depending on the number of passengers and fuel capacity. For this reason, these lines must be used only as
a guide. I
• With the camera lens characteristics, a distance shown on the screen may look different from actual dis-
tance or obstacles may look deformed.
• The camera is a precision instrument. Always prevent a strong impact, such as high-pressure car wash. Fail-
ure to do this results in a malfunction. J
• Adhesion of dirt, rain drops, and snow to the camera lens may lower the sharpness of camera image or
cause an improper operation in MOD (Moving Object Detection) function or parking frame recognition func-
tion. These adherents must be removed with a soft wet cloth first, then with a dry soft cloth. K
• Never damage the camera. Failure to do this may affect camera images.
PRECAUTIONS FOR THE HANDLING OF MOD (MOVING OBJECT DETECTION)
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) does not inform the driver of stationary objects. L
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) detects a moving object by processing image data of an image shown on
the display. The detection performance of a moving object is limited.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) may not operate properly when any of the following conditions is satisfied:
M
- Color and brightness of a moving object are similar to those of its background.
- Existence of blinking light, such as turn signal lamp
- Reflection of a strong light, such as head lamp light from other vehicles or sun light.
- Inappropriate orientation of camera due to folded mirror. AV
- Non-moving objects, such as water droplets dripping on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler or
moving shadow may be detected.
- Detection may not be performed properly depending on the speed, direction, distance, and shape of moving O
object.

Revision: October 2015 AV-221 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000012193816

CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via the communication with the around view monitor control unit:

Diagnosis mode Description


Around view monitor control unit and CAN communication circuit connection diagnosis is per-
Self Diagnostic Result
formed. Current and previous malfunctions are displayed collectively.
Diagnosis of vehicle signal that is received by around view monitor control unit can be per-
Data Monitor
formed.
• Calibration and initialization of each camera can be performed.
• Fine tuning of Birds-Eye view can be performed.
• Target line calibration of front wide view and rear wide view can be performed.
• Display of predicted course line can be switched to ON/OFF.
• Language of warning message can be selected.
Work Support • Neutral position adjustment of steering angle sensor can be performed.
• Camera screen activation enhancing display can be switched to ON/OFF.
• Calibration of turning radius display can be performed.
• Setting change can be performed depending on the vehicle specification with/without door
mirror automatic retracting function.
• Camera zoom ratio can be changed and used for fine tuning.
Around view monitor control unit part number, software version, and hardware version can be
ECU Identification
identified.
• The vehicle specification that is written in around view monitor control unit can be displayed
Configuration or stored.
• The vehicle specification can be written when around view monitor control unit is replaced.

SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT


Refer to AV-230, "DTC Index".
• In CONSULT self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively.
• The current malfunction indicates “CRNT”. The past malfunction indicates “PAST”.
Freeze Frame Data (FFD)
The following vehicle status is recorded when DTC is detected and is displayed on CONSULT:

Item name Display content


Numerical value is displayed indicating the number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after the DTC is de-
tected.
• When “0” is displayed, it indicates that the system is presently malfunctioning.
• When any numerical number other than “0” is displayed, it indicates that system malfunction in the past was
IGN COUNTER
detected, but the system is presently normal.
(0 to 39)
NOTE:
Each time when ignition switch turns OFF→ON, numerical number increases from 1→2→3...38→39. When
number of times exceeds 39, numeric display does not increase and 39 is displayed until self-diagnosis is
erased.

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items:
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the around view monitor control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.

Revision: October 2015 AV-222 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

Display item Remarks A


ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL Receiving status of steering angle signal received from steering angle sensor is displayed by
[On/Off] ON/OFF.
REVERSE SIGNAL B
Receiving status of reverse signal received from AV control unit is displayed by ON/OFF.
[On/Off]
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Receiving status of vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator control unit is displayed
[On/Off] by ON/OFF. C
CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL Receiving status of camera switch signal received from AV control unit is displayed by ON/
[On/Off] OFF.
CAMERA OFF SIGNAL D
Receiving status of camera OFF signal received from AV control unit is displayed by ON/OFF.
[On/Off]
Input type of steering angle sensor is displayed.
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE
NOTE:
[Absolute] E
For this vehicle, “Absolute” is displayed.
Type of steering gear ratio is displayed.
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE
NOTE:
[TYPE1] F
For this vehicle, “TYPE 1” is displayed.
STEERING POSITION
Steering position is displayed.
[LHD/RHD]
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL G
Input status of rear view camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
Input status of front view camera image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time. H
[OK/NG]
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG
Input status of side camera LH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG I
Input status of side camera RH image signal is displayed by OK/NG in real time.
[OK/NG]
ILL
Input status of illumination signal condition.
[ON/OFF] J
TURN SIGNAL
Input status of turn signal condition.
[ON/OFF]
K
WORK SUPPORT

Work support items Description


L
NON-VIEWABLE AREA REMIND-
ON/OFF setting of the non-viewable area reminder can be performed.
ER
The calibration can be initialized to factory shipment condition.
M
INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE CAL- NOTE:
IBRATION Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is
performed.
Steering angle sensor neutral position can be adjusted and registered. AV
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR AD- CAUTION:
JUSTMENT For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS
actuator control unit side. Refer to BRC-248, "Work Procedure".
O
Performs the calibration of front camera.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE NOTE:
(FRONT CAMERA) Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is
performed. P
Performs the calibration of side camera RH.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE NOTE:
(PASS-SIDE CAMERA) Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is
performed.

Revision: October 2015 AV-223 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
Work support items Description
Performs the calibration of side camera LH.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE NOTE:
(DR-SIDE CAMERA) Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is
performed.
Performs the calibration of rear camera.
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE NOTE:
(REAR CAMERA) Calibration of camera image caused by misalignment of the camera installation position is
performed.
The confirmation and adjustment of the difference between each camera can be per-
FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE formed.
VIEW The fine adjustment function of camera calibration can check and adjust the difference be-
tween each camera.
REAR WIDE VIEW FIXED GUIDE
The position of rear wide view guiding line can be changed.
LINE CORRECTION
CAUSE OF ENTRY CANCEL Displays cancel cause item.
MOD FUNCTION Allows turning ON/OFF of MOD function.
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE DIS-
ON/OFF setting of non-viewable area can be performed.
PLAY

ECU IDENTIFICATION
Around view monitor control unit part number, software version, and hardware version can be identified.

Revision: October 2015 AV-224 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000012193817
B

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


NOTE: C
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items:

Monitor Item Condition Value/Status D

ST ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL Ignition switch When steering angle sensor signal is inputted On
[On/Off] ON Other than the above Off
E
REVERSE SIGNAL Ignition switch R position On
[On/Off] ON Other than R position Off

VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Ignition switch When vehicle speed is inputted On F


[On/Off] ON Other than the above Off

CAMERA SWITCH SIGNAL Ignition switch When camera switch signal is inputted On
G
[On/Off] ON Other than the above Off

CAMERA OFF SIGNAL Ignition switch When camera OFF signal is inputted On
[On/Off] ON Other than the above Off H
ST ANGLE SENSOR TYPE Ignition switch
— Absolute
[Absolute] ON
STEERING GEAR RATIO TYPE Ignition switch I
— TYPE1
[TYPE1] ON
STEERING POSITION Ignition switch
LHD models LHD
[LHD] ON J
When rear camera image signal input status is normal OK
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL Ignition switch
[OK/NG] ON When rear view camera image signal input status is
NG
not normal K
When front camera image signal input status is nor-
OK
F-CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL Ignition switch mal
[OK/NG] ON When front camera image signal input status is not L
NG
normal
When side camera LH image signal input status is
OK
DR-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG Ignition switch normal M
[OK/NG] ON When side camera LH image signal input status is not
NG
normal
When side camera RH image signal input status is AV
OK
PA-SIDE CAMERA IMAGE SIG Ignition switch normal
[OK/NG] ON When side camera RH image signal input status is not
NG
normal O
Illumination ON On
ILL [ON/OFF]
Illumination OFF Off
P

Revision: October 2015 AV-225 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
TERMINAL LAYOUT

AWNIA3807ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES

Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
3
— Video output shield — — —
(Shield)

[Ignition switch ON]


4
Ground Video output signal Output • CAMERA switch is ON or shift position
(B)
is R position

JSNIA0834GB

5
— Front camera ground — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(B)
6 5 Front camera power
Output [Ignition switch ON] 6.0 V
(R) (B) supply
7 Front camera video
— — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(Shield) ground

[Ignition switch ON]


8 7 Front camera video
Input • CAMERA switch is ON or shift position
(W) (Shield) signal
is R position

JSNIA0834GB

9 Door mirror RH cam-


— — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(B) era ground
10 9 Door mirror RH cam-
Output [Ignition switch ON] 6.0 V
(R) (B) era power supply
11 Door mirror RH cam-
— — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(Shield) era video ground

[Ignition switch ON]


12 11 Door mirror RH cam-
Input • CAMERA switch is ON or shift position
(W) (Shield) era video signal
is R position

JSNIA0834GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-226 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
13 Door mirror LH cam- B
— — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(B) era ground
14 13 Door mirror LH cam-
Output [Ignition switch ON] 6.0 V
(R) (B) era power supply C
15 Door mirror LH cam-
— — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(Shield) era video ground
D

[Ignition switch ON]


16 15 Door mirror LH cam- E
Input • CAMERA switch is ON or shift position
(W) (Shield) era video signal
is R position

JSNIA0834GB F
17 Rear view camera
— — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(B) ground
18 17 Rear view camera G
Output [Ignition switch ON] 6.0 V
(R) (B) power supply
19 Rear view camera
— — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(Shield) video ground H

[Ignition switch ON] I


20 19 Rear view camera
Input • CAMERA switch is ON or shift position
(W) (Shield) video signal
is R position
J
JSNIA0834GB

24 Input/
— CAN low — —
(Y) Output K
26 Input/
— CAN high — —
(L) Output
32 39 [Ignition switch ON] L
Reverse signal Input 12.0 V
(G) (B) • R position
39
— Ground — [Ignition switch ON] 0V
(B) M
40 39
Ignition signal Input [Ignition switch ON or START] 12.0 V
(BG) (B)
AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-227 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000012193818

DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
U0428: ST ANGLE SENSOR • Front tire angle display is stopped.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle
CALIBRATION • Using “SETTING” menu display, switch
sensor is not complete.
each indicator of predicted course line dis-
play and MOD switch to “OFF” (turn OFF)
so that switch operation cannot be per-
formed.
The following functions are stopped
• When communication of steering angle
sensor signal is not normal:
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- Front tire angle display is stopped.
- Using “SETTING” menu display, switch
each indicator of predicted course line dis-
play and MOD switch to “OFF” (turn OFF)
When around view monitor control unit cannot so that switch operation cannot be per-
U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT transmit/receive CAN communication signal formed.
continuously for 2 seconds or more. • When communication of vehicle signal,
wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal
is not normal:
- Predicted course line is not displayed.
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped.
- Using “SETTING” menu display, switch
each indicator of predicted course line dis-
play and MOD switch to “OFF” (turn OFF)
so that switch operation cannot be per-
formed.
No-signal status of rear camera image signal is
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
U111A: REAR CAMERA IMAGE switch is ON.
SIGNAL NOTE:
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
No-signal status of side camera RH image sig-
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111B: SIDE CAMERA RH IM- tion switch is ON.
AGE SIGNAL NOTE:
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved. Camera image is not displayed (gray screen
No-signal status of front camera image signal is display).
continued for 500 ms or more while ignition
U111C: FRONT CAMERA IMAGE switch is ON.
SIGNAL NOTE:
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
No-signal status of side camera LH image sig-
nal is continued for 500 ms or more while igni-
U111D: SIDE CAMERA LH IM- tion switch is ON.
AGE SIGNAL NOTE:
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.

Revision: October 2015 AV-228 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
DTC
Malfunction detection condition Fail-safe condition
Display contents of CONSULT A
• Predicted course line is not displayed.
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is
stopped. B
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle • Tire icon is stopped.
U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB sensor is performed. NG signal from steering • Using “SETTING” menu display, switch
angle sensor is received. each indicator of predicted course line dis-
play and MOD switch to “OFF” (turn OFF) C
so that switch operation cannot be per-
formed.
Camera power supply voltage does not satisfy D
the following conditions for 2 seconds or more
when ignition switch is turned ON:
U1302: CAMERA POWER VOLT • When supplemental lighting power supply Camera power output is stopped.
output is ON: 5.9 – 6.5 V. E
• When OFF: 0 V by camera power supply
measurement.
• When camera calibration is incomplete.
F
• When camera information in around view
monitor control unit and information read
U1304: CAMERA IMAGE CALIB from camera are not the same. Unmatched icon display (red) is displayed
NOTE: (applicable for unmatched camera only).
G
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved.
The vehicle setting of around view monitor con-
H
trol unit is incomplete.
Operation is according to the vehicle setting
U1305: CONFIG UNFINISH NOTE:
value as default value.
Current malfunction is displayed only and is not
saved. I
When around view monitor control unit is not
Switch to camera screen is not allowed.
normal.
When communication between around view J
monitor control unit and each camera is not nor- On applicable camera screen, marking
Other (Red) is displayed.
mal.
When communication line between around
On applicable camera image screen, dis- K
view monitor control unit and each camera im-
age line is affected by electromagnetic noises. play (Blue) is displayed.

DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000012193819 L

If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspec-
tion priority chart:
M
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 U1305: CONFIG UNFINISH
AV
• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
2
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• U0428: ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION
O
• U111A: REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
• U111B: SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL
• U111C: FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
3
• U111D: SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL P
• U1232: ST ANGLE SEN CALIB
• U1302: CAMERA POWER VOLT
• U1304: CAMERA IMAGE CALIB

Revision: October 2015 AV-229 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
DTC Index INFOID:0000000012193820

DTC CONSULT display Refer to


U0428 ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION AV-246, "DTC Description"
AV-248, "AROUND VIEW MONI-
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TOR CONTROL UNIT : DTC De-
scription"
AV-250, "AROUND VIEW MONI-
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) TOR CONTROL UNIT : DTC De-
scription"
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL AV-251, "DTC Description"
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL AV-254, "DTC Description"
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL AV-257, "DTC Description"
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL AV-260, "DTC Description"
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB AV-263, "DTC Description"
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT AV-264, "DTC Description"
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIB AV-268, "DTC Description"
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH AV-269, "DTC Description"

Revision: October 2015 AV-230 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

WIRING DIAGRAM A
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000012193821
B

AV

AANWA1376GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-231 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

AANIA3964GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-232 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3965GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-233 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

AANIA3966GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-234 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

AV

AANIA3967GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-235 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000012193822

OVERALL SEQUENCE

JSNIA4482GB

• Reference 1: Refer to AV-222, "CONSULT Function".


• Reference 2: Refer to AV-230, "DTC Index".
• Reference 3: Refer to AV-271, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items:
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom a malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Inspection End.
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
Revision: October 2015 AV-236 2016 Maxima NAM
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
1. Connect CONSULT and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-222, "CONSULT Function".
NOTE: A
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below:
- Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data (FFD).
B
Is DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
C
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
1. Check the DTC indicated in the “Self Diagnostic Result”.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC Index. Refer to AV-230, "DTC Index". D

>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS E

Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-271, "Symptom
Table". F

>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR G
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”.
NOTE: H
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC
has been indicated in the “Self Diagnostic Result”.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur. I
Does the symptom occur?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> Inspection End. J

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-237 2016 Maxima NAM


ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR CON-
TROL UNIT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AROUND VIEW MONITOR
CONTROL UNIT
Description INFOID:0000000012193823

When replacing around view monitor control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT
“Configuration” before replacement.
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” after replacing around
view monitor control unit
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
• When replacing around view monitor control unit, you must perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with
CONSULT.
• Never perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” except for new around view monitor control unit
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000012193824

1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION


CONSULT Configuration
Perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to AV-239, "Descrip-
tion".
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” after replacing around view
monitor control unit.

>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".

>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” to write vehicle specifica-
tion. Refer to AV-239, "Work Procedure".

>> GO TO 4.
4.CALIBRATE CAMERA IMAGE
Perform calibration of camera image. Refer to AV-240, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR) : Description".

>> Work End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-238 2016 Maxima NAM


CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
CONFIGURATION (AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT)
A
Description INFOID:0000000012193825

Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing around view B
monitor control unit.
Configuration has three functions as follows

Function Description C
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current around view monitor control unit.
READ CONFIGURATION
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
D
WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual setting Writes the vehicle configuration with manual setting.
WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
CAUTION: E
• When replacing around view monitor control unit, you must perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with
CONSULT.
• Never perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” except for new around view monitor control unit.
F
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000012193826

1.WRITING MODE SELECTION G


CONSULT Configuration
Select “CONFIGURATION” of AVM.
H
When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.
When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION - CONFIG FILE” I

CONSULT Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file”. J

>> Work End. K


3.PERFORM “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”
CONSULT Configuration
L
Select “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” to write vehicle specifications into the around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:
• Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal
control of ECU. M
• Make sure to select “NEXT” even if the default settings displayed on the CONSULT are the desired
settings. If “NEXT” is not selected, the configuration process will be incomplete.
NOTE: AV
If manual configuration items are not displayed, touch “NEXT”.

>> GO TO 4. O
4.OPERATION CHECK
Confirm that each function controlled by around view monitor control unit operates normally.
P
>> Work End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-239 2016 Maxima NAM


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description
INFOID:0000000012193827

Adjust the center position of the predictive course line of the front view and rear view monitor.
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000012193828

1.DRIVING
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more.

>> Work End.


CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description
INFOID:0000000012193829

• Perform camera calibration and perform writing to the around view monitor control unit after removal/installa-
tion or replacement of each camera or camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, or others) or replace-
ment of around view monitor control unit.
• By performing this camera calibration procedure, the boundary of each camera image is aligned to the white
lines on the road near the vehicle. The boundary of each camera image may not be aligned to the white lines
far from the vehicle. The farther the line, the greater the difference is.
• Following the flow chart shown in the figure, perform calibration:

JPNIA1341GB

• For details of calibration operation, refer to AV-240, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW
MONITOR) : Work Procedure".
CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000012193830

CAUTION:

Revision: October 2015 AV-240 2016 Maxima NAM


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
When around view monitor control unit is replaced, perform the control unit setting before performing
this calibration. Refer to AV-240, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : A
Description".
1.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR SCREEN
B
Check whether or not un-match display “ ” is on screen.
Is un-match display on screen?
YES >> GO TO 2. C
NO >> GO TO 4.

E
AWNIA3801ZZ

2.CHECK WHETHER OR NOT AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT IS REPLACED


Check whether or not around view monitor control unit is replaced. F
Is around view monitor control unit replaced?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5. G
3.RELEASE UN-MATCH DISPLAY (PERFORM ONLY WHEN AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
IS REPLACED)
H
CONSULT Work Support
1. Select “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE”.
NOTE:
I
In random order, perform the operation for all cameras for which un-match display " " appears.
- Front camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (FRONT CAMERA)”
- Passenger side camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (PASS-SIDE CAMERA)”
- Driver side camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (DR-SIDE CAMERA)” J
- Rear camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (REAR CAMERA)”
2. On each camera calibration screen, press “APPLY”, and then press “OK” button.
CAUTION: K
• Never perform any operation other than selecting “APPLY” button.
• Never perform “INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION”.
3. Display the around view monitor screen. Check that images are displayed normally without any difference
between images for each camera. L
Is there a malfunction such as a difference between camera images?
YES >> Calibration end.
NO >> GO TO 1. M
4.PERFORM SIMPLIFIED CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT BY “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”
1. Put target line 1 beside each axle using packing tape, etc. AV
2. Put target line 2 at a position approximately 30 cm (11.81 in) away from each side of the vehicle (the left
and right). Check that the target line is a length equivalent to the vehicle length plus an additional approx-
imate length of 1.0 m (39.37 in) (parallel to the vehicle as much as possible).
O

Revision: October 2015 AV-241 2016 Maxima NAM


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
Preparation of simplified target line

JSNIA0927ZZ

1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2


A. Approx. 30 cm (11.81 in) B. Approx. 1.0 m (39.37 in)

3. CONSULT Work Support


Select “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”.
4. Select the left and right cameras on CONSULT screen. Perform the following calibration:
- Check that target line 1 and marker are aligned normally on screen. If difference is detected, align marker
using “+” and “–” of “AXIS X” and “AXIS Y” on CONSULT screen.
- Check that target line 2 is aligned normally on screen without difference between images of each camera.
If difference is detected, align images so that line 2 is displayed in a straight line using “+” and “–”of “AXIS
X”, “AXIS Y”, and “ROTATE” on CONSULT screen.
NOTE:
Press “SELECT” on CONSULT screen and select camera position for adjustment.
CAUTION:
• Never adjust the front camera and rear camera. Only adjust the side cameras LH/RH.
• Perform adjustment operation slowly because approximately 1 second is required for changing
image on screen.
Simplified target line adjustment method

JSNIA0929ZZ

1. Target lines 1 2. Target lines 2 3. Marker for target line 1


Crosshair cursor (mark indicated by
4. Boundary between cameras 5.
the selected camera)
Adjustment method for target lines 1 Adjustment method for target lines 2
A. B.
(right) (right)

5. Adjust the left and right cameras. Check that difference of images on screen between target line 1 and
marker, and between target lines 2 are solved. Press “APPLY”.

Revision: October 2015 AV-242 2016 Maxima NAM


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
NOTE:
• The setting can be initialized to factory default condition using “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE” of A
Work Support.
• The adjustment value on this mode is canceled when “INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION” is
performed.
B
Is the difference corrected?
YES >> • Select “OK” to end calibration.
CAUTION:
C
After selecting “OK”, never perform any operation other than “BACK” on CONSULT.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE” D
Preparation of target line
1. Hang a string with a weight as shown in the figure. Put the points FM0 and RM0 (mark) on the ground at
the center of the vehicle front end and rear end using white packing tape or a pen. E
2. Route the vinyl string under the vehicle, and then pull and fix the vinyl string at a point approximately 1.0
m (39.37 in) at the front and rear of the vehicle through points FM0 and RM0 using packing tape.
Target line preparation procedure 1 F

JSNIA1054ZZ

1. Thread 2. Weight 3. Point FM0 (mark) K


4. Point RM0 (mark) 5. Packing tape (to fix the vinyl string) 6. Vinyl string

3. Put points FM and RM (mark) 75 cm (29.53 in) from the points FM0 and RM0 individually. L
4. Route the vinyl string through points FM and RM using a triangle scale, and then fix it at approximately 1.5
m (59.06 in) on both sides with packing tape.
5. Put points FL, FR, RL, and RR (mark) at a distance of half the vehicle width, plus 30 cm (11.81 in) to the
left and right from points FM and RM. M

Target line preparation procedure 2


AV

JSNIA0921ZZ

Revision: October 2015 AV-243 2016 Maxima NAM


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

1. Point FM 2. Point RM 3. Triangle scale


4. Point FL (mark) 5. Point FR (mark) 6. Point RL (mark)
7. Point RR (mark)
30 cm (11.81 in)
[A half of the vehicle width plus 30
A. 75 cm (29.53 in) B. Approximately 1.5 m (59.06 in) C:
cm (11.81 in) from the points FM and
RM]

6. Draw the lines of the points FL – RL and FR – RR with the vinyl string, and fix them with packing tape.
7. Put a mark at the center of front axle. Use a triangle ruler to draw a line at the position 1 m (39.37 in) back-
ward from the mark placed at the center of front axle so that the line becomes perpendicular to the line
drawn between point FL-RL and point FR-RR and fix with packing tape.
8. Put a mark at the center of rear axle. Use a triangle ruler to draw a line at the position 1 m (39.37 in) back-
ward from the mark placed at the center of rear axle so that the line becomes perpendicular to the line
drawn between point FL-RL and point FR-RR and fix with packing tape.
Target line preparation procedure 3

JSNIA6184ZZ

1. Point FL 2. Point FR 3. Point RL


4. Point RR 5. Center position of axle 6. Triangle scale
A. 1 m (39.37 in)

Perform “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE”


CONSULT Work Support
1. Select “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE”.
NOTE:
In random order, perform the operation for all cameras.
- Front camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (FRONT CAMERA)”
- Passenger side camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (PASS-SIDE CAMERA)”
- Driver side camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (DR-SIDE CAMERA)”
- Rear camera: “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (REAR CAMERA)”
2. On each calibration screen of “REAR CAMERA”, “FRONT CAMERA”, “DR-SIDE CAMERA”, and “PASS-
SIDE CAMERA”, operate “+” and “–” of “AXIS X”, “AXIS Y”, and “ROTATE” so that images on screen of
target line and calibration maker are aligned.
3. Press “APPLY” on CONSULT screen. “Writing...” is displayed, and then the adjustment result is displayed
on the display.
CAUTION:
Check that “Writing...” is displayed. Never perform other operations while “Writing...” is displayed.
4. Press “APPLY” on CONSULT screen. “Writing...” is displayed, and then the adjustment result is written to
around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:
Check that “Writing...” is displayed. Never perform other operations while “Writing...” is displayed.

>> GO TO 6.

Revision: October 2015 AV-244 2016 Maxima NAM


INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

6.PERFORM “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW” A


This mode is designed to align the boundary between each camera image that cannot be aligned in the “CAL-
IBRATING CAMERA IMAGE” mode.
CONSULT Work Support B
1. Select “FINE TUNING OF BIRDS-EYE VIEW”.
2. Operate “+” and “–” of “AXIS X”, “AXIS Y”, and “ROTATE” so
that images on screen of target line on the ground and marker
are aligned between each camera. C
CAUTION:
Perform adjustment operation slowly because approxi-
mately 1 second is required for changing image on screen. D
NOTE:
Press “SELECT” on CONSULT screen and select camera posi-
tion for adjustment.
3. Press “APPLY” on CONSULT screen. “Writing...” is displayed, E
and then the adjustment result is displayed on the display.
JSNIA5157ZZ
CAUTION:
Check that “Writing...” is displayed. Never perform other operations while “Writing...” is displayed. F
4. Press “APPLY” on CONSULT screen. “Writing...” is displayed, and then the adjustment result is written to
around view monitor control unit.
CAUTION:
• Check that “Writing...” is displayed. Never perform other operations while “Writing...” is dis- G
played.
• After selecting “OK”, never perform any operation other than “BACK” on CONSULT.
NOTE: H
• The setting can be initialized to the factory default setting using “CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE” of Work
Support.
• The adjustment value on this mode is canceled when “INITIALIZE CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION” is per-
formed. I

>> Calibration end.


J

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-245 2016 Maxima NAM


U0428 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U0428 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193831

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
ST ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRA- Signal (terminal) –
U0428 TION
(Steering angle sensor calibration) Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle sensor is not complete
FAIL-SAFE
• Predicted course line is not displayed
• MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is stopped
• Front tire angle display is stopped
• Using “SETTING” menu display, switch each indicator of predicted course line display and MOD switch to
“OFF” (turn OFF) so that switch operation cannot be performed
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK DTC PRIORITY
If DTC U0428 is displayed with DTC U1232, first perform the confirmation procedure (trouble diagnosis) for
DTC U1232.
Is applicable DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis of applicable DTC. Refer to AV-263, "DTC Description".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM” using.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U0428 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-246, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193832

1.ADJUST THE NEUTRAL POSITION OF THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR


When U0428 is detected, adjust the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.
Perform adjustment of the neutral position of the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-248, "Work Procedure".
CAUTION:
For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS actuator control
unit side.

>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
Revision: October 2015 AV-246 2016 Maxima NAM
U0428 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-246, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U0428 detected again? A
YES >> Replace steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-370, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End.
B

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-247 2016 Maxima NAM


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193833

DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
two communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L), allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communica-
tion Signal Chart".
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON

CAN COMM CIRCUIT Signal (terminal) –


U1000
(CAN COMM CIRCUIT) Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
CAN communication system
FAIL-SAFE
The following functions are stopped:
• When communication of steering angle sensor signal is not normal:
- Predicted course line is not displayed
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is stopped
- Front tire angle display is stopped
- Using “SETTING” menu display, switch each indicator of predicted course line display and MOD switch to
“OFF” (turn OFF) so that switch operation cannot be performed
• When communication of vehicle signal, wheel speed sensor signal, and shift signal is not normal:
- Predicted course line is not displayed
- MOD (Moving Object Detection) function is stopped.
- Using “SETTING” menu display, switch each indicator of predicted course line display and MOD switch to
“OFF” (turn OFF) so that switch operation cannot be performed
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1000 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-248, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193834

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN

Revision: October 2015 AV-248 2016 Maxima NAM


U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. A
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-248, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL
UNIT : DTC Description". B
Is DTC U1000 detected again?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagno-
sis Flow Chart". C
NO >> Inspection End.

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-249 2016 Maxima NAM


U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193835

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Signal (terminal) –


U1010
[Control unit (CAN)] Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
Around view monitor system does not function
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1010 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-250, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193836

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN


CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-250, "AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL
UNIT : DTC Description".
Is DTC U1010 detected again?
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-250 2016 Maxima NAM


U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193837

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
Signal (terminal) Rear camera image signal (terminal 20)
REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
U111A Rear camera image signal circuit is shorted D
(CAN COMM CIRCUIT) Threshold
or open
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Rear camera image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE F
Camera image is not displayed (gray screen display)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”. I
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111A detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-251, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193838 K

1.CHECK CONTINUITY OF REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and rear view camera connector B76
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and rear view cam-
era harness connector B76. M

Around view monitor control unit Rear view camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal AV
17 1
M170 B76 Yes
18 2
O
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground.

Around view monitor control unit P


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M170 18 No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: October 2015 AV-251 2016 Maxima NAM


U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

2.CHECK VOLTAGE OF REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY


1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and rear view camera connector B76.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Around view monitor control unit (−) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift
M170 18 Ground 6.0 V
position is “R”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK CONTINUITY OF REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and rear view camera connector B76.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and rear view cam-
era harness connector B76.

Around view monitor control unit Rear view camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
19 5
M170 B76 Yes
20 4
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground.

Around view monitor control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
19
M170 No
20
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and rear view camera connector B76.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170.

Around view monitor control unit


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Connector
Terminal

“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift posi-


M170 20 19
tion is “R”.

JSNIA0834GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-252 2016 Maxima NAM


U111A REAR CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-276, "Removal and Installation".
A

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-253 2016 Maxima NAM


U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193839

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON

SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIG- Signal (terminal) Door mirror RH signal circuit (terminal 12)
U111B NAL Door mirror RH signal circuit is open or
(Side camera right image signal) Threshold
shorted
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Side camera RH image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE
Camera image is not displayed (gray screen display)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111B detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-254, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193840

1.CHECK CONTINUITY OF SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror RH connector D114.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and door mirror RH
harness connector D114.

Around view monitor control unit Door mirror RH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
9 16
M170 D114 Yes
10 19
4. Check continuity between door mirror RH harness connector D114 and ground.

Door mirror RH
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
16
D114 No
19
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2015 AV-254 2016 Maxima NAM
U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

2.CHECK VOLTAGE OF SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY A


1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror RH connector D114.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground.
B

(+)
Voltage
Around view monitor control unit (−) Condition C
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift po-
M170 10 Ground 6.0 V
sition is “R”. D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation". E
3.CHECK CONTINUITY OF SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror RH connector D114.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and door mirror RH
harness connector D114.
G
Around view monitor control unit Door mirror RH
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
11 18
M170 D114 Yes
12 17
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground. I

Around view monitor control unit


Continuity J
Connector Terminal
Ground
11
M170 No
12 K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. L
4.CHECK SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror RH connector D114. M
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170.
AV
Around view monitor control unit
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Connector
Terminal O

P
“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift posi-
M170 12 11
tion is “R”.

JSNIA0834GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-255 2016 Maxima NAM


U111B SIDE CAMERA RH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
NO >> Replace side camera RH. Refer to AV-275, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-256 2016 Maxima NAM


U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193841

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON

FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIG- Signal (terminal) Front view camera image signal (terminal 8)
U111C NAL Front camera image signal circuit is open or D
(Front camera image signal) Threshold
shorted
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more
E
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Front camera image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE F
Camera image is not displayed (gray screen display)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”. I
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111C detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-257, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193842 K

1.CHECK CONTINUITY OF FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector E238.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and front camera
harness connector E238. M

Around view monitor control unit Front camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal AV
5 2
M170 E238 Yes
6 1
O
4. Check continuity between front camera harness connector E238 and ground.

Front camera P
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
1
E238 No
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2015 AV-257 2016 Maxima NAM
U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

2.CHECK VOLTAGE OF FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY


1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector E238.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170.

Around view monitor control unit


Voltage
(+) (−) Condition
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift posi-
M170 5 6 6.0 V
tion is “R”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK CONTINUITY OF FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector E238.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and front camera
harness connector E238.

Around view monitor control unit Front camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
7 4
M170 E238 Yes
8 3
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground.

Around view monitor control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
7
M170 No
8
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector E238.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170.

Around view monitor control unit


(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Connector
Terminal

“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift posi-


M170 8 7
tion is “R”.

JSNIA0834GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-258 2016 Maxima NAM


U111C FRONT CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
NO >> Replace front camera. Refer to AV-274, "Removal and Installation".
A

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-259 2016 Maxima NAM


U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193843

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON

SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIG- Signal (terminal) Side camera LH image signal (terminal 16)
U111D NAL Side camera LH image signal circuit is open
(Side camera left image signal) Threshold
or shorted
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Side camera LH image signal circuit
FAIL-SAFE
Camera image is not displayed (gray screen display)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U111D detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-260, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193844

1.CHECK CONTINUITY OF SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror LH connector D12.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and door mirror LH
harness connector D12.

Around view monitor control unit Door mirror LH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
13 16
M170 D12 Yes
14 19
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground.

Around view control module


Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
13
M170 No
14
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: October 2015 AV-260 2016 Maxima NAM
U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

2.CHECK VOLTAGE OF SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY A


1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror LH connector D12.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground.
B

Around view monitor control unit


Voltage
(+) (−) Condition C
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift
M170 14 13 6.0 V
position is “R”. D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation". E
3.CHECK CONTINUITY OF SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror LH connector D12.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and door mirror LH
harness connector D12.
G
Around view monitor control unit Door mirror LH
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
15 18
M170 D12 Yes
16 17
4. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground. I

Around view monitor control unit


Continuity J
Connector Terminals
Ground
15
M170 No
16 K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. L
4.CHECK SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror LH connector D12. M
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check signal between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170.
AV
Around view monitor control unit
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Connector
Terminal O

P
“CAMERA” switch is ON or shift posi-
M170 16 15
tion is “R”.

JSNIA0834GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-261 2016 Maxima NAM


U111D SIDE CAMERA LH IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
NO >> Replace side camera LH. Refer to AV-275, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-262 2016 Maxima NAM


U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193845

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON

ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Signal (terminal) –


U1232
(Steering angle sensor calibration) Threshold – D
Diagnosis delay time 30 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE E
• Neutral position adjustment of the steering angle sensor is incomplete
• Steering angle sensor
FAIL-SAFE F
Predictive course line is not displayed
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
G
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self diagnostic result” mode of “MULTI AV”. I
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1232 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-263, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193846 K

1.ADJUST THE PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION OF THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
L
Adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on ABS actuator and electrical unit (control unit) side. Refer
to BRC-248, "Work Procedure".
NOTE:
When DTC U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor. M

>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN AV

Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-263, "DTC Description".


Is DTC U1232 detected again? O
YES >> Replace steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-370, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End.
P

Revision: October 2015 AV-263 2016 Maxima NAM


U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193847

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON
Signal (terminal) Camera power supply circuit (terminal 18)
CAMERA POWER VOLT
U1302 Camera power supply voltage is 5.9 V-6.5 V
(Camera power voltage) Threshold
when ON, or 0 V when OFF
Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Short circuit to battery or short circuit to ground of camera power supply output circuit
• Around view monitor control unit
FAIL-SAFE
Camera power output is stopped
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1302 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-264, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193848

1.CHECK AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check around view monitor control unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-270, "AROUND VIEW
MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT CIRCUIT (CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT)
1. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and rear view camera connector B76.
2. Check whether or not continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and
ground is normal.

Around view monitor control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M170 18 No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
3.CHECK REAR VIEW CAMERA POWER SUPPLY "1"
Revision: October 2015 AV-264 2016 Maxima NAM
U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. A
3. Check whether or not voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 is nor-
mal.
B
Around view monitor control unit
Reference value
(+) (–)
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal C
M170 18 17 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
D
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK REAR CAMERA POWER SUPPLY 2 E
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect rear camera connector B76.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. F
4. Check whether or not voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 is nor-
mal.
G
Around view monitor control unit
Reference value
(+) (–)
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal H
M170 18 17 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
I
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace rear camera. Refer to AV-276, "Removal and Installation".
5.CHECK FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT CIRCUIT (CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT) J
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and front camera connector E228.
3. Check whether or not continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and K
ground is normal.

Around view monitor control unit L


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M170 5 No
M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
AV
6.CHECK FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY "1"
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. O
3. Check whether or not voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 is nor-
mal.
P
Around view monitor control unit
Reference value
(+) (–)
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
M170 5 6 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.

Revision: October 2015 AV-265 2016 Maxima NAM


U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
7.CHECK FRONT CAMERA POWER SUPPLY "2"
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect front camera connector E228.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check whether or not voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 is nor-
mal.

Around view monitor control unit


Reference value
(+) (–)
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
M170 5 6 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace front camera. Refer to AV-274, "Removal and Installation".
8.CHECK SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT CIRCUIT (CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror RH connector D114.
3. Check whether or not continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and
ground is normal.

Around view monitor control unit


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M170 10 No
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
9.CHECK SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY "1"
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check whether or not voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 is nor-
mal.

Around view monitor control unit


Reference value
(+) (–)
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
M170 10 9 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
10.CHECK SIDE CAMERA RH POWER SUPPLY "2"
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect door mirror RH connector D114.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check whether or not voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 is nor-
mal.

Revision: October 2015 AV-266 2016 Maxima NAM


U1302 CAMERA POWER VOLT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

Around view monitor control unit A


Reference value
(+) (–)
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
B
M170 10 9 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 11. C
NO >> Replace side camera RH. Refer to AV-275, "Removal and Installation".
11.CHECK SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT CIRCUIT (CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT)
D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170 and door mirror LH connector D12.
3. Check whether or not continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and
ground is normal. E

Around view monitor control unit


Continuity F
Connector Terminal Ground
M170 14 No
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
12.CHECK SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY "1" H
1. Connect around view monitor control unit connector M170.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check whether or not voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 is nor- I
mal.

Around view monitor control unit J


Reference value
(+) (–)
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
K
M170 14 13 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 13. L
NO >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
13.CHECK SIDE CAMERA LH POWER SUPPLY "2"
M
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect door mirror LH connector D112.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check whether or not voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 is nor- AV
mal.

Around view monitor control unit O


Reference value
(+) (–)
Connector (Approx.)
Terminal
P
M170 14 13 6.0 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace side camera LH. Refer to AV-275, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: October 2015 AV-267 2016 Maxima NAM


U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
U1304 CAMERA IMAGE CALIBRATION
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193849

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON

CAMERA IMAGE CALIB Signal (terminal) –


U1304
(Camera image calibration) Threshold –
Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE
Camera calibration is incomplete
FAIL-SAFE
Unmatched icon display (red) is displayed (applicable for unmatched camera only)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC U1304 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-268, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193850

1.PERFORM CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE


Perform camera calibration. Refer to AV-240, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR)
: Description".

>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-268, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U1304 detected again?
YES >> Replace malfunctioning camera.
NO >> Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-268 2016 Maxima NAM


U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
U1305 CONFIG UNFINISH
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000012193851

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT screen terms


DTC No. DTC detection condition
(Trouble diagnosis content) C
Diagnosis condition When ignition switch is ON

CONFIG UNFINISH Signal (terminal) –


U1305
(Configuration unfinish) Threshold – D
Diagnosis delay time 2 seconds or more

POSSIBLE CAUSE E
The vehicle setting of around view monitor control unit is incomplete
FAIL-SAFE
Operation is according to the vehicle setting value as default value F

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 30 seconds. H
3. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 30 seconds or more.
4. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AVM”.
5. Check DTC. I
Is DTC U1305 detected?
YES >> Proceed to AV-269, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". J
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193852
K
1.PERFORM CONFIGURATION OF AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Perform configuration of around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-239, "Work Procedure".
L

>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN M
Perform DTC confirmation procedure again. Refer to AV-269, "DTC Description".
Is DTC U1305 detected again?
AV
YES >> Replace around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-273, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Inspection End.

Revision: October 2015 AV-269 2016 Maxima NAM


POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193853

1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check that the following fuse is not blown:

Power source Fuse No. Capacity


Ignition switch ON or START 30 10 A
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Check voltage between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground.

(+)
Reference Value
Signal name Around view monitor control unit (−) Ignition switch position
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ignition signal M170 40 Ground ON Battery voltage
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between around view monitor control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect around view monitor control unit connector M170.
3. Check continuity between around view monitor control unit harness connector M170 and ground.

(+)
Around view monitor control unit (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
M170 39 Ground Yes
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> Repair harness or connector.

Revision: October 2015 AV-270 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000012193854
B

AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM


C
Symptom Check items Probable malfunction location
Around view monitor control unit
“AVM” is not displayed on the system selection screen of power supply circuit
D
CONSULT. • BAT power supply circuit
Screen is not switched to camera • Ignition power supply circuit
image when CAMERA button is
pressed and when shift position Check that the following Data Camera switch signal and
Around view monitor control unit E
is shifted to the reverse position. Monitor items operate nor- reverse signal are normal.
mally using CONSULT:
• Camera switch signal Camera switch signal or re-
CAN communication circuit
• Reverse signal verse signal is not normal.
F
Screen is switched when press- Camera image signal circuit
Only superimposing is displayed (only images that AV con-
ing camera button or shifting se- Refer to AV-302, "Diagnosis Proce-
trol unit plots are displayed).
lector lever to the reverse dure".
position; however, all views are G
AV control unit
not displayed. Superimposing is not displayed.
Refer to AV-87, "Work Flow".
The screen is not switched to the
rear view image even if the selec- H
The front view is displayed normally. Reverse signal circuit.
tor is shifted to the reverse posi-
tion.
• Front view screen is not dis- Check the following Data Front camera power supply circuit I
played. Monitor items using CON- and image signal circuit
• Image signal: NG
• Front of top view screen is not SULT: Refer to AV-257, "Diagnosis Proce-
displayed. • Front camera image signal dure".
J
• The rear view screen is not dis- Check the following Data Rear camera power supply circuit
played. Monitor items using CON- and image signal circuit
• Image signal: NG
• Rear of top view screen is not SULT: Refer to AV-251, "Diagnosis Proce-
displayed. • Rear camera image signal dure". K
Check the following Data
• The side view screen is not dis- Side camera LH power supply cir-
Monitor items using CON-
played. cuit and image signal circuit
SULT: • Image signal: NG L
• Left side of top view screen is Refer to AV-260, "Diagnosis Proce-
• Side camera LH image sig-
not displayed. dure".
nal
Check the following Data
Monitor items using CON- Side camera RH power supply cir- M
Right side of top view image is
SULT: • Image signal: NG cuit and image signal circuit. Refer
not displayed.
• Side camera RH image to AV-254, "Diagnosis Procedure".
signal
AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-271 2016 Maxima NAM


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description INFOID:0000000012193855

NOTE:
For Navigation system operation information, refer to Navigation system Owner's Manual.
BASIC OPERATIONS

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution


The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
The systems is in the video mode. Press “AUDIO” to change the mode.
No image is displayed.
The interior of the vehicle is above 80°C (176°F) or
Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
high temperature, and the protection of the display
cooled down.
reacts, and a display is turned off.
Screen not clear. Contrast setting is not appropriate. Adjust the contrast of the display.
The volume is not set correctly, or it is turned off. Adjust the volume of voice guidance.
No voice guidance is available. The
volume is too high or too low. Voice guidance is not provided for certain streets
This is not a malfunction.
(roads displayed in gray).
No map is displayed on the screen. A screen other than MAP screen is displayed. Press “MAP”.
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low.
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
This is not a malfunction.
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the navigation system.
NOTE:
Locations stored in the Address Book and other memory functions may be lost if the vehicle's battery is dis-
connected or becomes discharged. If this occurs, service the vehicle's battery as necessary and re-enter the
information in the Address Book.

Revision: October 2015 AV-272 2016 Maxima NAM


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A


AROUND VIEW MONITOR CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000012193856
B

ALNIA1753ZZ
H
1. Around view monitor control unit Front

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193857 I

REMOVAL
NOTE: J
Before replacing around view monitor control unit, perform “Before Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configura-
tion” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to AV-238, "Description".
1. Remove center console finisher (RH). Refer to IP-20, "Exploded View". K
2. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the around view
monitor control unit (1).
3. Remove clip (A) and bolts (C) and remove around view monitor L
control unit.

AV
ALNIA1762ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. O
CAUTION:
• Be sure to perform “After Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” or “Manual Configuration”
when replacing around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-238, "Description". P
• Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov-
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.)
and replacing the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-240, "CALIBRATING CAMERA
IMAGE (AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description".
NOTE:
Perform predictive course line center position adjustment. Refer to AV-240, "PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description".

Revision: October 2015 AV-273 2016 Maxima NAM


FRONT CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
FRONT CAMERA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193858

REMOVAL
1. Remove core support cover. Refer to EXT-16, "Exploded View".
2. Remove condenser air deflector. Refer to HA-41, "CONDENSER : Exploded View".
3. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the front camera.

(1) : Hood lock


: Front

ALNIA1756ZZ

4. Remove screws (A) and remove front camera (1).

: Front

ALNIA1757ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov-
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.)
and replacing the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-240, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
(AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description".

Revision: October 2015 AV-274 2016 Maxima NAM


SIDE CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
SIDE CAMERA
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193859

REMOVAL B
1. Remove door mirror rear finisher. Refer to MIR-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the side camera.
C
3. Remove screw (B) and release pawls to remove side camera
finisher (1).

: Pawl D

ALNIA1759ZZ
F
4. Remove screw (A) and remove side camera (1).

I
ALNIA1758ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J
CAUTION:
Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov-
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.) K
and replacing the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-240, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
(AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description".
L

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-275 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM]
REAR CAMERA
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012193860

REMOVAL
1. Remove license lamp finisher. Refer to EXT-40, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove trunk lid finisher. Refer to INT-51, "TRUNK LID FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the rear camera (1).

: Front

ALNIA1761ZZ

4. Release pawl then remove rear camera (1).

: Pawl
: Front

ALNIA1760ZZ

INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov-
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.)
and replacing the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-240, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
(AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description".

Revision: October 2015 AV-276 2016 Maxima NAM


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000012193886

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
F
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni- H
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the I
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal, and AV Control Unit INFOID:0000000012193887
J
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal, and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more after turning the igni-
tion switch OFF. K
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 sec-
onds.
L
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000012193888

M
M-CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. AV
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000012193889 O

M-CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM


P

Revision: October 2015 AV-277 2016 Maxima NAM


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]

PKIA0306E

• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000012193890

• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
- Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

Revision: October 2015 AV-278 2016 Maxima NAM


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000012193891
B
The actual shape of the tools may differ from those illustrated here.
Tool number Description
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
— Removing trim components
(J-46534) D
Trim Tool Set

AWJIA0483ZZ

F
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000012193892

G
Tool name Description
Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts
H

PIIB1407E

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-279 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000012193893

AWNIA4094ZZ

No. Component Function


1. Rear view camera Refer to AV-281, "Rear View Camera".
2. AV control unit Refer to AV-280, "AV Control Unit".
3. Steering angle sensor Refer to AV-281, "Steering Angle Sensor".

AV Control Unit INFOID:0000000012193894

DESCRIPTION
• AV control unit is located in the center of the instrument panel
assembly.
• AV control unit integrates the following functions and controls the
rear view monitor system:

Unit equipped
Display
Camera controller

ALNIA1763ZZ

SPECIFICATION

Vehicle width guide lines


Guide line display function
Camera controller Predictive course lines
Steering signal input method CAN communication

Revision: October 2015 AV-280 2016 Maxima NAM


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
Rear View Camera INFOID:0000000012193895

A
• The rear view camera is installed next to the rear license plate
lamp.
• Super-small CMOS camera (color) using CMOS* for the image B
pickup element is adopted.
• With the mirror processing function, a mirror image is sent as if it is
viewed by a rear view mirror.
• Power for the camera is supplied from the AV control unit and the C
image at the rear of the vehicle is sent to the AV monitor control
unit.
NOTE: D
*: "CMOS" is an abbreviation of Complementary Metal Oxide Semi- JSNIA6012ZZ
conductor and features low power consumption and high speed
reading rate of electric charge.
E
Specification

Image pickup element 1/3.8-inch CMOS image sensor F


Effective number of pixels Approx. 300,000 pixels (632 × 480)
Minimum brightness 1 lx
Angle of view H: 190° V: 141° G
Image With the mirror processing function

Steering Angle Sensor INFOID:0000000012193896


H

• Steering angle sensor is installed to the spiral cable.


• Steering angle sensor sends the steering signal necessary for pre- I
dictive course line of the rear view monitor to the AV control unit via
CAN communication.
J

JSNIA1571ZZ

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-281 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000012193897

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AWNIA3802GB

AV Control Unit Input Signal (CAN Communication)

Transmit unit Signal name


Steering angle sensor Steering angle signal

DESCRIPTION
Operation Description
• When the selector lever is shifted to the reverse position, the rear view monitor image is displayed.
• When the selector lever is shifted to any position other than the reverse position, the original image (the
image displayed before the rear view monitor image) is displayed.
Camera Image Operation Principle
• The AV control unit that receives the reverse signal input supplies power to the rear view camera and gives
input of image signal.
• The AV control unit outputs the rear view camera image to the display when the reverse signal is inputted.
• The AV control unit generates the warning message, vehicle width guide lines and the predicted course lines
on the image from the rear view camera and transmits the rear view camera image signal to the front display
unit.
Vehicle Width Guide Lines and Predicted Course Lines Display Function at Rear View Monitor Display
• The vehicle width guide lines and the predicted course lines that indicate the vehicle route according to the
steering angle are displayed on the rear view monitor display to allow the driver to more easily judge dis-
tances between the vehicle and objects and help the driver back into a parking space.
• The AV control unit receives the steering signal from the steering sensor via CAN communication and draws
a vehicle width guide line according to the steering angle.
• When the vehicle width guide lines are displayed, the vehicle width guide lines are displayed translucently.
• The predicted course lines are not displayed when the steering angle is in the neutral position.

JSNIA3994GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-282 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
Precautions for Vehicle Width Guide Lines and Predicted Course Lines Display on the Rear View Monitor Display
Vehicle width guide lines and predicted course lines on the display may be different from actual lines depend- A
ing on vehicle conditions and road conditions.
Precautions for road conditions
• Since vehicle width guide lines and predicted course lines are drawn based on the road, a different distance B
may be displayed if a protruding block is present nearby.

JSNIA3995GB
AV

Precautions for block


O

Revision: October 2015 AV-283 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
• Since vehicle width guide lines and predicted course lines are drawn based on the road, a different distance
may be displayed if a protruding block is present nearby.

JSNIA3996GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-284 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
A
Description INFOID:0000000012402837

• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts with multifunction switch operation, and the AV control unit per- B
forms a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
• Perform a CONSULT diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start (e.g., the screen does not display
anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.).
C
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000012402838

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM D


Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually. E
• The self-diagnosis mode performs diagnoses on the AV control unit connections between system compo-
nents. Then it displays the diagnosis results on the display.
• The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and
F
set values as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking,
modifying or adjusting generally requires human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judg-
ment automatically).
G
On Board Diagnosis Item

Mode Description
H
• AV control unit diagnosis.
Self Diagnosis
• Diagnoses the connections across system components.
The following check functions are available:
• Color tone check by color bar display, white display and black display I
Display Diagnosis • Light and shade check by gray scale display
• Touch panel check
• Sensor sensitivity settings J
Vehicle Signals Diagnosis of signals can be performed.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
ANC/ASC Allows for testing and adjustment of the ANC/ASC system. K
The reception status of GPS can be confirmed.
Navigation* Display On/Off of the simulation menu of navigation.
The system malfunction is displayed. When the malfunctioning item is select-
L
Error Location Display ed, the time and place that the selected malfunction last occurred are dis-
played.
Confirmation/ The communication condition of each unit of NISSANCONNECTSM can be M
Adjustment AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
The signal connected to camera control unit can be checked and the guiding
Camera Control Unit
line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be adjusted. AV
SXM Displays the information related to satellite radio.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erases the connection history of unit and error history.
O
Reset Settings Initializes the default data.
Version information of the following items is displayed:
• AV control unit
Version Information • BOSE amp. P
• Combination meter
• Around view monitor control unit
Program Update Version of the AV control unit can be updated.
The received volume adjustment of hands-free phone and microphone
Hands-free Phone
speaker check can be performed.

METHOD OF STARTING
Revision: October 2015 AV-285 2016 Maxima NAM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
3. Press the MENU button.

ALNIA1766ZZ

4. While menu button is pressed rotate the volume encoder left,


right, and left. On each rotation, it should be at least 7 clicks.

ALNIA1767ZZ

5. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/
Adjustment” can be selected.
NOTE:
When a diagnostic screen is not displayed, press the “MENU” switch. And then, restart from the procedure of
Step 3.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self Diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-diagnosis mode starts.
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trou-
ble diagnosis.

2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is completed. The unit names and the connection
lines are color-coded according to the diagnostic results.

Diagnosis results Unit Connection line


Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow

Unit malfunction Note Red Green

NOTE:
Control Unit (AV control unit) and BOSE Amp. are displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated.
The symptom is AV control unit internal error. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined
according to the following order of priority: red > gray.

- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a component in the diagnosis result
screen.
Detection Range of Self-diagnosis Mode
• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line
between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of the AV control unit.

Revision: October 2015 AV-286 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check the applicable display with the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts. A
Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red.

Possible malfunction location / Action to B


Screen switch Description
take
Check AV control unit power supply and
ground circuits. C
Refer to AV-156, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Di-
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit agnosis Procedure".
Audio Head Unit
power supply and ground circuits. When detecting no malfunction in those
components, replace AV control unit. D
Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
When either one of the following items are E
detected:
• Sound signal circuits between BOSE • Malfunctioning speaker circuits.
amp. and each speaker are malfunction- • Malfunctioning front or rear microphone
BOSE Amp. ing. circuits. F
• Sound signal circuits between BOSE • Replace BOSE amp. Refer to AV-194,
amp. and either front or rear microphone "Removal and Installation".
are malfunctioning.
• BOSE amp. malfunction is detected. G

H
Possible malfunction location / Action to
Area with yellow connection lines Description
take
When either one of the following items are • Combination meter power supply and I
detected: ground circuits.
• Combination meter power supply and Refer to MWI-50, "COMBINATION
Control Unit ⇔ Cluster ground circuits are malfunctioning. METER : Diagnosis Procedure".
J
• AV communication circuits between AV • AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and combination meter are control unit and combination meter are
malfunctioning. malfunctioning.
GPS antenna connection malfunctions de- GPS antenna K
Navigation unit ⇔ GPS Antenna
tected. Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Satellite antenna connection malfunctions Satellite antenna
Audio Head Unit ⇔ XM Antenna
detected. Refer to AV-117, "Diagnosis Procedure". L

CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode M
indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted.
2. Select each switch on the “Confirmation/Adjustment Mode” screen to display the relevant trouble diagno-
sis screen. Touch the “MAP” to return to the initial "Confirmation/Adjustment Mode" screen. AV
Display Diagnosis
Confirmation of the AV control unit screen.
O

Revision: October 2015 AV-287 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

Item Description
• Display 8 colors of following bars:
- White
- Yellow
- Cyan (Close to light blue)
Color Spectrum Bar - Green
- Magenta (Close to purplish red)
Display Settings
- Red
- Blue
- Black
Gradation Bar Display 32 gradation gray-scale image to a screen.
White Display Display white screen.
• The function can check the presence of a circle indication and deviation from
where it should be while touching the touch panel. If you hit Map button you will be
Touch Panel Response Check
taken to a trace screen. Here you can check the function of continuous gesture on
the screen. To back out of screen hit the map button.
Touch Panel Calibration • Allows you to recalibrate the touch screen panel.

Vehicle Signals
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and the signals recognized by the system.

AV control unit
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks
ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle Speed Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
ON Parking brake is pressed
Parking Brake Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
OFF Parking brake is released
ON Headlamp switch is ON.
Lights Signal Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
OFF Headlamp switch is OFF.
ON Ignition switch ON.
Ignition Signal —
OFF Ignition switch in ACC position.
Shift the selector lever to “R” posi-
ON
tion.
Reverse Signal Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
Shift the selector lever to a position
OFF
other than “R” position.

Speaker Test
Select “Speaker Test” to display the speaker diagnosis screen. Touch “Start” to generate a test tone in a
speaker. Touch “Next” to generate a test tone in the next speaker. Touch “End” to stop the test tones.
ANC/ASC
Select Confirmation/Adjustment to access ANC/ASC settings

Item Description
• Start-Next
Left Front Tweeter
• Stop
• Start-Next
Front Center
• Stop
### Speaker test
• Start-Next
RIght Front Tweeter
• Stop
• Start-Next
R-PSHELF R-WOOFER
• Stop

Revision: October 2015 AV-288 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
Item Description
A
Status Displays software version for ANC, ASC, and Config Results.
Setting Allows user to enable/disable ANC/ASC after connection diagnosis.
ANC/ASC Connection diagnosis Displays the status of each signal acquisition route. B
Outputs the test tone imitating ANC ON/OFF. Active test function will be
Active test
available after the connection diagnosis.

Navigation C

Item Description
Sensor Information The reception status of GPS can be confirmed.
D

Error Location Display


The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-Diagnosis” is E
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation. F
The error record displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of
the following points:
• Place of the error occurrence is represented by the longitude and latitude at the time an error occurred. If G
current location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occurrence cannot
be located correctly.
• The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a up-and-down manner.
Error item H
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items.
I
Error item Applicable DTC Reference
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 AV-109
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) U1010 AV-111 J
Mismatched configuration data stored U1223 AV-112
Amplifier temperature error U1231 AV-113
K
Steer. Angle Sensor calibration U1232 AV-114
GPS Antenna error U1244 AV-116
XM Antenna connection error : open L
U1258 AV-117
XM Antenna connection error : short
Cluster connection error U1267 AV-119
M
Confirm user connection unit U12B7 AV-121
Radio Antenna error : open
U12BE AV-122
Radio Antenna error : short AV
CAN COMM Diagnosis

CAN COMM Monitor O


• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (master unit) and each unit.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunc-
tion is detected. It increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle. The upper
limit of the counter is 39. P
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.

Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
CMF Send Switch OK / UNKW OK / 0 – 39 / —
CMF Receive Bose AMP OK / UNKW OK / 0 – 39 / —

Revision: October 2015 AV-289 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
CMF Receive AVM OK / UNKW OK / 0 – 39 / —
CMF Receive Meter OK / UNKW OK / 0 – 39 / —
CMF Receive Audio OK / UNKW OK / 0 – 39 / —

Camera Cont.

Item Description
Correct Draw Line of Rear View Camera The guiding lines in the rear view monitor can be adjusted.
Displays the current configuration data.
NOTE:
Check/Change Configuration
Refer to the following list for the items of the configuration adjust-
ment function:
Reset Configuration Initializes the camera system configuration.
Camera System Type Sets the type of camera that is connected.

Configuration list
Setting (Default value)
Setting item
Direct adaptive steering models Vehicle speed sensitive P/S models
Predictive Course Lines With SBW Without SBW
Rear Coeff. K 1.37847 1.37847
Rear Coeff. F 0.0394 0.0394
Rear Coeff. P1 −0.24463 −0.24463
Rear Coeff. P2 0.07005 0.07005
Rear Coeff. C1 −0.00608 −0.00608
Rear Coeff. C2 −0.00001 −0.00001
Rear Coeff. D1 130.6 130.6
Rear Coeff. D2 −35 −35
Car Width 1822.9 1822.9
Rear Offset 3835.175 3835.175
Rear Height 581.589 581.589
Rear L/R Angle 0 0
Rear Up/Dn Angle 0 0
Rear Roll Angle 0 0
Bumper Rear Dist. 0 0
Bumper Rear Ax Dist 0 0
Max. Steering Angle 31.56 31.56
Min. Turning Radius 1 1.47
Wheelbase 2850 2850
Total Length 4792 4792
Steering Gear Ratio 0.032 0.047
Tot.Width With Mirrors 0 0

SXM
SXM Mode Diagnosis

Item Description
Diagnostic Mode Display Display adjustment items to test satellite radio function.
External Diagnostic Mode Set in external diagnostic mode.

Revision: October 2015 AV-290 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV control unit memory. (Clear the records of A
the unit that has been removed.)
Reset Settings
B
Item Description
Reset User Data Initializes the AV control unit.
Reset Configuration Initializes the configuration data.
C

Version Information
Version information of each control unit and switch is displayed. D
Program Update
Version of the AV control unit can be updated.
E
Hands-Free Phone
The hands-free phone reception volume adjustment and microphone and speaker test functions are also
available.
F
Item Description
HF Vol. Adjustment The reception volume can be set in three steps: “Low”, “Standard” and “High”.
Voice Microphone Test The microphone audio can be directly connected to the speakers to perform a microphone test. G
Onload model ID Displays the on board unit ID.

CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000012402839


H

APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT performs the following functions via the communication with the AV control unit: I

Diagnosis mode Description


Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication J
Self Diagnostic Result
circuit of the Multi AV system and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is inputted to the AV control unit can be performed.
Work Support Steering angle sensor can be adjusted.
K

ECU Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked.


• Read and save the vehicle specification. L
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing AV control unit.

SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT


• In CONSULT self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively. M
• The current malfunction indicates “CRNT”. The past malfunction indicates “PAST”.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes, U1000, U1010, U1300 and U1310, are detected. The
counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
AV
• Refer to AV-109, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Freeze Frame Data (FFD)
The following vehicle status is recorded when DTC is detected and is displayed on CONSULT. O
Item name Display content
ODO/TRIP METER
P
(km)
Total driving distance (odometer value) upon DTC detection is displayed.
TOTAL DISTANCE
(km)

DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items:
Revision: October 2015 AV-291 2016 Maxima NAM
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit.
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.

Display item Display Vehicle status Remarks


On Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG
Off Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
On Parking brake is applied. normal.
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.
Block the light beam from the auto
On light optical sensor when the light
switch is ON.

ILLUM SIG Either of the following conditions:


• Light switch is OFF.
Off • Expose the auto light optical sen- —
sor to light when the light switch is
ON.
On Ignition switch ON.
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in ACC position.
On Selector lever is in R position.
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
REV SIG Selector lever is in any position other
Off normal.
than R.

WORK SUPPORT
Adjust the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.
CAUTION:
For vehicles with VDC, adjust the steering angle sensor neutral position on the ABS actuator control
unit side. Refer to BRC-248, "Work Procedure".

Item Description
ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the neutral position of the steering angle sensor.

ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.

Revision: October 2015 AV-292 2016 Maxima NAM


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A


AV CONTROL UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000012193901
B

VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL


NOTE: C
The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applicable
to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items:

Monitor item Condition Value/Status D

Ignition switch Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) On


VHCL SPD SIG
ON Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) Off
E
Ignition switch Parking brake is applied. On
PKB SIG
ON Parking brake is released. Off
Block the light beam from the auto light opti- F
On
Ignition switch cal sensor when the light switch is ON.
ILLUM SIG
ON Expose the auto light optical sensor to light
Off
when the light switch is OFF or ON. G
Ignition switch ON On
IGN SIG
Ignition switch ACC Off
H
Ignition switch Selector lever is in R position. On
REV SIG
ON Selector lever is in any position other than R. Off

TERMINAL LAYOUT I

AV
AWNIA3814ZZ

PHYSICAL VALUES
O
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.) P
+ – Signal name
Output
19
Ground Battery power supply Input Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
(G)
23 Input/
— M-CAN low — —
(LG) Output

Revision: October 2015 AV-293 2016 Maxima NAM


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
24 Input/
— M-CAN high — —
(SB) Output
25 Input/
— CAN low — —
(P) Output
26 Input/
— CAN high — —
(L) Output
[Ignition switch ON]
7.0 V or more
30 • R position
Ground Reverse signal Input
(G) [Ignition switch ON]
3.0 V or less
• Other than R position
31
Ground Ignition power supply Input Ignition switch ON Battery voltage
(BG)
57
Ground Camera power supply Output [Ignition switch ON] 6.2 V
(R)
58
Ground Camera ground — Ignition switch ON 0V
(B)

59 87 Camera image signal (with [Ignition switch ON]


Input
(B) (B) around view monitor) • Image is displayed.

SKIB0827E

59 87 Camera image signal (with [Ignition switch ON]


Input
(W) (B) rear view camera) • Image is displayed.

SKIB0827E

60
— Camera shield — — —
(Shield)

Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000012193902

If a malfunction occurs in the Nissan Multi AV, AV control unit performs fail-safe activation according to the
detected malfunction.

Detection item Nissan multi AV operation in fail-safe mode DTC


The system using the CAN communication signal from control unit which cannot
U1000
CAN communication communicate does not function.
The system using the CAN communication signal does not function. U1010
A function of AV control unit becomes mismatched with a vehicle specification and
Configuration U1223
destination.
BOSE amp. BOSE system does not function. U1231
Steering angle sensor Predictive course line is not displayed. U1232

Revision: October 2015 AV-294 2016 Maxima NAM


AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
Detection item Nissan multi AV operation in fail-safe mode DTC
A
• Sound is not outputted by a speaker.
• CD is not played.
AV control unit • Radio does not operate. U1234
NOTE: B
Symptom other than an item may occur.
GPS antenna The vehicle positions of a navigation screen differ. U1244
Satellite radio antenna Satellite radio is not received. U1258 C
External data input Audio equipment which is connected to USB does not oper-
USB communication U12B7
box ate.
Rear view camera Rear camera image is not displayed. U12B8 D
Radio antenna Radio is not received. U12BE

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-295 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

WIRING DIAGRAM
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000012193903

AANWA1375GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-296 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

AV

AANIA3958GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-297 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

AANIA3959GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-298 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

AV

AANIA3960GB

Revision: October 2015 AV-299 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000012193904

OVERALL SEQUENCE

JSNIA4482GB

• Reference 1: Refer to AV-40, "CONSULT Function".


• Reference 2: Refer to AV-304, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW AND SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items:
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
Is the occurred symptom a malfunction?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Inspection End.
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
1. Connect CONSULT and perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV”. Refer to AV-40, "CONSULT Function".

Revision: October 2015 AV-300 2016 Maxima NAM


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed. A
2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below:
- Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data (FFD).
Is DTC displayed? B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC C
1. Check the DTC indicated in the “Self Diagnostic Result”.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC list.
D
>> GO TO 5.
4.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS E
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-304, "Symptom
Table".
F
>> GO TO 5.
5.ERROR PART REPAIR
G
1. Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
2. Perform a self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT.
NOTE:
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC H
has been indicated in the “Self Diagnostic Result”.
3. Check that the symptom does not occur.
Does the symptom occur? I
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO >> Inspection End.
J

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-301 2016 Maxima NAM


CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (WITH REAR VIEW MONITOR)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (WITH REAR VIEW MONITOR)
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000012193905

1.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to “R” position.
3. Check the signal between AV control unit harness connector M161 (without BOSE audio system), or
M163 (with BOSE audio system), and ground.

AV control unit
(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Connector
Terminal
M161 (without
BOSE audio
system)
When rear view camera image
59 58
M163 (with is displayed.
BOSE audio
system)
SKIB2251J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M161 (without BOSE audio system), or M163 (with BOSE audio
system), and rear view camera harness connector B76.
3. Check the continuity between AV control unit harness connector M161 (without BOSE audio system), or
M163 (with BOSE audio system), and rear view camera harness connector B76.

AV control unit Rear view camera


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M161 (without BOSE
audio system)
59 B76 4 Yes
M163 (with BOSE au-
dio system)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check the continuity between AV control unit harness connector M161 (without BOSE audio system), or M163
(with BOSE audio system), and ground.

Revision: October 2015 AV-302 2016 Maxima NAM


CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (WITH REAR VIEW MONITOR)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

(+) A
AV control unit (−) Continuity
Connector Terminal
B
M161 (without BOSE
audio system)
59 Ground No
M163 (with BOSE au-
C
dio system)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. D
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the continuity between AV control unit harness connector M161 (without BOSE audio system), or M163 E
(with BOSE audio system), and rear view camera harness connector B76.

AV control unit Rear view camera F


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M161 (without BOSE
audio system)
G
58 B76 1 Yes
M163 (with BOSE au-
dio system)
H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-307, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
I

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-303 2016 Maxima NAM


REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000012193906

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

Symptom Possible cause Inspection item


• Harness between rear view camera and
Camera image is not shown.
AV control unit Camera image signal circuit.
(Vehicle width and predictive course line are
• Rear view camera Refer to AV-302, "Diagnosis Procedure".
displayed.)
• AV control unit
• Harness between BCM and AV control
unit
• Ignition power supply circuit Reverse signal circuit.
Camera image does not switch.
• Transmission range switch Refer to TM-98, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• AV control unit
• BCM

Revision: October 2015 AV-304 2016 Maxima NAM


NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
Description INFOID:0000000012193907

NOTE: B
For navigation system operation information, refer to Navigation System Owner's Manual.
BASIC OPERATIONS
C
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution
The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
The system is in the video mode. Press “AUDIO” to change the mode. D
No image is displayed.
The interior of the vehicle is above 80°C (176°F) or
Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
high temperature, and the protection of the display
cooled down.
reacts, and a display is turned off. E
Screen is not clear. Contrast setting is not appropriate. Adjust the contrast of the display.
The volume is not set correctly, or it is turned off. Adjust the volume of voice guidance.
No voice guidance is available. The F
volume is too high or too low. Voice guidance is not provided for certain streets
This is not a malfunction.
(roads displayed in gray).
No map is displayed on the screen. A screen other than map screen is displayed. Press “MAP”.
G
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is low.
ment is slow. warmed up.
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
H
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the navigation system.
NOTE:
Locations stored in the Address Book and other memory functions may be lost if the vehicle's battery is dis-
connected or becomes discharged. If this occurs, service the vehicle's battery as necessary and re-enter the I
information in the Address Book.

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-305 2016 Maxima NAM


AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION


AV CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000012340446

AWNIA4086ZZ

1. A/C switch assembly 2. AV control unit 3. Audio unit finisher (LH)


4. Audio unit bracket (LH) 5. A/C auto amp. 6. Audio unit bracket (RH)
7. Audio unit finisher (RH)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012300884

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before disconnecting the AV control unit and battery terminals, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 30 seconds.
NOTE:
• Before replacing AV control unit, perform “Before Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” to save or
print current vehicle specification. Refer to AV-94, "Description".
• After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds.
Data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Refer to PG-101, "Removal and Installation (Battery)".
2. Remove A/C switch assembly. Refer to HAC-100, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove AV control unit screws then pull out AV control unit.
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from AV control unit and remove.
5. Remove AV control unit bracket (LH/RH) screws and AV control unit brackets [(LH/RH) (if necessary)].
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “After Replace ECU” of “Read / Write Configuration” or “Manual Configuration”
when replacing AV control unit. Refer to AV-94, "Description".
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: October 2015 AV-306 2016 Maxima NAM
REAR VIEW CAMERA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (NAVIGATION)]
REAR VIEW CAMERA
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000012300949

REMOVAL B
1. Remove license lamp finisher. Refer to EXT-40, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove trunk lid finisher. Refer to INT-51, "TRUNK LID FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
C
3. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the rear camera (1).

: Front
D

F
ALNIA1761ZZ

4. Release pawl then remove rear camera (1).


G
: Pawl
: Front
H

ALNIA1760ZZ

J
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Perform the calibration and perform the writing to the around view monitor control unit when remov- K
ing and replacing each camera, removing the camera mounting parts (front grille, door mirror, etc.)
and replacing the around view monitor control unit. Refer to AV-240, "CALIBRATING CAMERA IMAGE
(AROUND VIEW MONITOR) : Description". L

AV

Revision: October 2015 AV-307 2016 Maxima NAM

You might also like